Panasonic KX F900 User Manual FAX MACHINE Manuals And Guides 97120075

PANASONIC Fax Machines Manual 97120075 PANASONIC Fax Machines Owner's Manual, PANASONIC Fax Machines installation guides

User Manual: Panasonic KX-F900 KX-F900 PANASONIC FAX MACHINE - Manuals and Guides View the owners manual for your PANASONIC FAX MACHINE #KXF900. Home:Computer & Office Equipment Parts:Panasonic Parts:Panasonic FAX MACHINE Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 230 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

OHUEHNO.KM[9610089C1

Service Manual

and Technical Guide

900MHz CORDLESS FAX

KX-F900

(for U.S.A.)

,_ WARNING

] his service inlormation is designed for experienced repair technicians only and _snot designed for use by the general public.

It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product.

Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians.

Any attempt to service or repair the product or products dealt with in this service information by anyone else could result in serious

injury or death.

KX-F900

I...... j

When you mention the serial number, write down the 11 digits. The serial number may be found on the bottom of the unit.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

INTRODUCTION

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ....................................................................................................................................... 5

INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST ........................................................................................................................ 5

FOR SERVICE TECHNICIANS .............................................................................................................................. 5

BATTERY CAUTION .............................................................................................................................................. 6

AC CAUTION .......................................................................................................................................................... 6

STANDARD BATTERY LIFE .................................................................................................................................. 7

PERSONAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................................. 7

SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................................................................. 8

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES .................................................................................................................................. 8

LOCATION OF CONTROLS .................................................................................................................................. 9

FEATURES ........................................................................................................................................................... 10

CONNECTION ...................................................................................................................................................... 11

INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................................................. 12, 13

COMPONENT LOCATIONS ................................................................................................................................. 14

MAINTENANCE ITEM .................................................................................................................................... 14, 15

CLEANING THE UNIT .......................................................................................................................................... 16

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

TROUBLESHOOTING SUMMARY ...................................................................................................................... 18

USER RECEIVERABLE ERRORS ....................................................................................................................... 19

DETAIL OF TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................................ 20~91

PROGRAMMING AND LISTS ........................................................................................................................ 92~97

TEST FUNCTIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 97, 98

ADJUSTMENT

TABLE OF TEST EQUIPMENTS AND TOOL ................................................................................................... 100

ADJUSTING THE FEEDER PRESURE ............................................................................................................. 101

CONFIRMATION OF SEPARATION SPRING ................................................................................................... 101

CCD ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................................................................................ 102-104

DOCUMENT READ START POSITION ADJUSTMENT ............................................................................ 104, 105

CORDLESS ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................................................................... 107-113

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS .............................................................................................................. 115-125

HOW TO REPLACE FLAT PACKAGE IC .......................................................................................................... 126

-2-

KX-F900

GIR£;UII OPI:RA]IONS

CONNECTION DIAGRAM ................................................................................................................................ 128

GENERAL BLOCK DIAGRAM ................................................................................................................... 129, 130

CONTROL SECTION ................................................................................................................................. 131~136

FACSIMILE SECTION ................................................................................................................................ 137~145

MODEM SECTION ..................................................................................................................................... 146-152

EXPLANATION OF ANALOG SECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM .................................................................... 153, 154

NCU SECTION ........................................................................................................................................... 155, 156

ITS AND MONITOR SECTION ................................................................................................................... 157, 158

TAM INTERFACE SECTION ...................................................................................................................... 159-161

OPERATION PANEL .......................................................................................................................................... 162

LCD COG TYPE ................................................................................................................................................. 163

SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY SECTION ................................................................................................ 164-166

CORDLESS SECTION ............................................................................................................................... 167-183

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (DIGITAL BOARD) ............................................................................................... 185, 186

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (DIGITAL CIRCUIT) ............................................................................................................ 187

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (ANALOG CIRCUIT) ........................................................................................................... 188

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (ANALOG BOARD) .............................................................................................. 189, 190

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (CCD) ........................................................................... 191

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY ) ................................................................................ 192

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT) ....................................................................... 193

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (OPERATION PANEL) ................................................................................................. 194

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (OPERATION PANEL CIRCUIT) ........................................................................................ 195

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (CORDLESS BASE UNIT) ........................................................................................... 196

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (CORDLESS BASE UNIT) ................................................................................................. 197

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (RF UNIT) ..................................................................................................................... 198

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (RF UNIT) ........................................................................................................................... 199

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (PORTABLE HANDSET) .............................................................................................. 200

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (PORTABLE HANDSET) .................................................................................................... 201

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (CHARGE) ................................................................... 202

_ERMINAL GUIDE OF IC'S, TRANSISTORS AND DIOE)ES ............................................................................ 203, 2o4

205

TOOLS ......................................................................................................................................................................

CABINET, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PARTS LOCATION .................................................................. 206~211

212

ACCESSORIES AND PACKING MATERIALS ..........................................................................................................

REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ........................................................................................... 213~230

-3-

KX-F900

INTRODUCTION

Hay_

Safety Precautions ............................................................................ 5

Insulation Resistance Test ........................................................................ 5

For Service Technicians ........................................................................... 5

Batten] Caution ......................................................................................... 6

AC Caution ............................................................................................... 6

Standard Battery Life ................................................................................ 7

Personal Safety Precautions ..................................................................... 7

Specifications ............................................................................................ 8

Optional Accessories ................................................................................ 8

Location of Controls .................................................................................. 9

Features .................................................................................................. 10

Connection .............................................................................................. 11

Installation ......................................................................................... 12, 13

Component Locations ............................................................................. 14

Maintenance Item ............................................................................. 14, 15

Cleaning the Unit .................................................................................... 16

KX-F900

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1. Before servicing, u_plugthe power cord to prevent an electric shock.

2. When replacing pads, use only the manufacturer's recommended components.

3. Check the condition of the power cord. Replace if wear or damage is evident.

4. After servicing, be sure to restore the lead dress, insulation barriers, insulation papers, _hields, etc.

5. Before returning the serviced equipment to the customer, be sure to perform the following insulation resistance

test to prevent the customer from being exposed to shock hazards.

-I

-i

INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST

1. Unplug the power cord and short the two prongs of the plug with a jumper wire.

2. Turn on the power switch.

3. Measure the resistance value with an ohmmeter between the jumpered AC plug and each exposed metal cabinet part

(screwheads, control shafts, handle brackets, etc.).

"Note: Some exposed parts may be isolated from the chassis by design. These will read infinity.

4. If the measurement is outside the specified limits, there is a possibility of a shock hazard.

The equipment should be repaired and rechecked before it is returned to the customer.

Exposed --

metal

part Ohmmeter

Resistance = more than1M Q

(at DC 500 V)

FOR SERVICE TECHNICIANS

ICs and LSIs are vulnerable to static electricity.

When repairing, the following precautions will help prevent recurring malfunctions.

1) Cover the plastic parts boxes with aluminum foil.

2) Ground the soldering irons.

3) Use a conductive mat on the worktable.

4) Do not touch IC or LSI pins with bare fingers.

-5-

KX-F900

BATTERY CAUTION

CAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the

manufacture. Discard used batteries according to following caution:

Disposal of lithium batteries should be performed by permitted, professional disposal firms knowledgeable in state govern-

ment federal and local hazardous materials and hazardous waste transportation and disposal requirements.

Battery continues to have no transportation limitations as long as they are separated to prevent short circuits and packed

in strong packaging.

Commercial firms that dispose of any quantity of lithium cells should have a mechanism in place to account for their ulti-

mate disposition. This is a good practice for all types of commercial or industrial waste.

Recommend Type Number: CR2032 (BATT)

CR2032 (BATT) Manufactured by MATSUSHITA

Manufactured by SONY

AC CAUTION

For safety, before closing the lower cabinet, please make sure of the following precautions.

(_ The earth lead is fixed by the screw.

(_) The AC connector is connected properly.

(_) Wrap the AC lead around the core 3 times.

(BOTTOM VIEW)

AC Inlet

Earth Lead

(Ferrite Core)

Earth Lead

O o

Screw

AC Connector Earth

Lead

STANDARD BATTERY LIFE

If your Panason_c battery is fully charged;

While in use (,TALK) Up to about 4.5 hours

While not in use (Stand-By) Up to about 14 days

•Battery life may vary depending on usage conditions and ambient temperature.

•Clean the handset and the main unit charge contacts with adry soft cloth once a

month, or the battery may not charge properly.

• Once the battery is fully charged, you do not have to place the handset on the main unit until

the TALK/BATT LOW indicator flashes slowly.

• The battery cannot be overcharged.

KX-F900 -_

.-I

:;o

PERSONAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Be careful not to let your hair, clothes fingers, accessories, etc., become caught in any moving sections of the unit.

These are driven by the carriage monitor, and the slow down gear, the paper feed roller, the pressure roller, the eject roller,

the spur, the pick-up roller, etc., which are driven by the paper feed motor. These separation roller and document feed roller

which are rotated by the document feed motor and a gear which makes the two rollers rotate.

Also, the spurs are metal and sharply pointed. Be careful not to touch them accidentally by hand.

Document rollers

roller gear

)aration roller gear

feedgear

KX-F900

SPECIFICATIONS

•Main unit

1. Applicable Lines:

2. Document Size:

3. Effective Scanning Width:

4. Printing Paper Size:

5. Effective Printing Width:

6. Transmission Time*:

7, Scanning Density:

8. Halftone Level:

9. Scanner Type:

10. Printer Type:

11, Data Compression System:

12. Modem Speed:

13. Operating Environment:

14. Dimensions (HXWX D):

15. Mass 0Neight):

16, Power Consumption:

17. Power Supply:

Public Switched Telephone Network

Max. 216 mm (8 1/2") in width

Max. 600 mm (23 %') in length

208 mm(8 3/18')

216 mm X max. 50 m (8 1/2"X164') roll

216 mm (81/2')

Approx.15 sec/page (Original mode)

Approx.30 sec/page (G3 Normal mode)

Horizontal : 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch)

Vertical : 3.85 lines/mm (98 lines/inch) -Standard mode

7.7 lines/mm (196 lines/inch) -Fine/Halftone mode

15.4 lines/mm (392 lines/inch) -Superfine mode

64-level

CCD image sensor

Thermal printing

Modified Huffman (MH), Modified READ (MR)

9600/7200/4800/2400 bps; Automatic Fallback

5-35°C (41-95 °F), 45-80 % RH (Relative Humidity)

Approx. 118X366X265 mm (4 21/32"X13 %' X10 7/18')

Approx. 3.4 kg (7.5 lb.)

Standby: Approx. 5W /Transmission: Approx. 15W

Reception: Approx. 35W /Copy: Approx. 40W

Maximum: Approx. 100W

120V AC, 60Hz (This unit will not function at 50 Hz.)

This specifications is for

U.S.A. version only.

Refer to the simplified manual

(cover) for other areas.

•Handset

1. Operating Environment:

2. Dimensions (HX W× D):

3. Weight:

4. Power Supply:

5. Frequency:

6. Security Codes:

5-35°C (41-95 °F), 45-80 % RH (Relative Humidity)

Approx. 39X55X271 mm (1 17/32"X2 3/32'X10 11/16')

Approx. 200 g (0.4 lb.)

Ni-Cd battery (3.6 V, 600 mAh)

902-904 MHz, 926-928 MHz (30 channels)

1,000,000

*Transmission speed depends upon the contents of the pages, resolution, telephone line conditions and capability of

receiving unit. 15 second speed based upon CCITT No.1 Test Chart.

.Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

Parts No. Description Comment

KX-A106 Standard Thermal Recording Paper 216 mm X 30 m (8 1/2"X98') roll,

with 25 mm (1") core

KX-A116 Standard Thermal Recording Paper 216 mm X 50 m (8 1/2"X164') roll,

with 25 mm (1") core

Super Thermal recording Paper 216 mm X30 m (8 1/2"X98') roll,

KX-A125 (Like plain paper) with 25 mm (1") core

Front view

LOCAl ION OF CON]-ROLS

uattery charger

(beneath the cover)

Spare battery

cover

-- Antenna

Document entrance

KX-F900 I

.-I

Paper stacker

-- Document feeder tray

Document guide(s)

Microphone

CHARGE Indicator

SPARE CHARGE Indicator Document exit

Front lid open button

Cont;rol panel

Dial keypad HELP Display panel RESOLUTION

DIRECTORY MENU Direct call stations LOWER

I ......... , III _1# _e"_ll RESOW1,ON..!I'_ 9 _0 ' - I

I (Z)(D(]DiI_ -__ _ °'1 I_--_--'=' I

I,.4-_@@,_L_____ _ t___

..-iv;__. __ _; \ \ ", j _ _T*,T,ooP_,r_ I

®( ))

Y-I ! t I -1

FLASH MUTE AUTO RECEIVE VOLUME |

STOP

TONE REDIAL/PAUSE SP-PHQNE LOCATOR/INTERCOM

IN USE indicator START/COPY/SET

-9-

Handset

An_ena

INTERCOM indicator

TALK/BAT1 (Battery)

LOW indicator

TALK

TONE

PROGRAM

REDIAL/PAUSE _

FEATURES

General

•Automatic paper cutter

• Answering machine interface

• 64-Level halftones resolution

• Large 165 ft. paper roll

• Help printout

Facsimile

• Easy-to view LCD (16-character)

•Automatic document feeder (up to 15 sheets)

• Paper curl reduction technology

• Resolution: Standard/Fine/Super Fine/Half Tone

• Distinctive ring detection

• Super thermal paper

• Correct order reception printout

900MHz Cordless

• Fax activation from handset

• Intercom with 2-way paging

• Lighted keypad

• 14-day battery life

• Sound ChargeF _technology

• lO-station speed dial

• Spare battery charger

Integrated Telephone System

•Speakerphone

• Telephone directory with alpha-search

• One touch dialer (10 phone-number)

• 50-station speed dialer

-10-

KX-F900

CONNEGIION

--I

Connect to

"LINE".

Dialing mode switch:

Set to TONE.

• If you cannot dial,

set to PULSE.

Telephone line

cord

DIALING MODE

TONE JLPULSE

Line-surge

protector )

Single telephone line

(RJ11 C)

Power outlet_ _ (120 V, 60 Hz)

Power surge_

protector )

Note:

• For additional equipment protection, we recommend the use of asurge protector. The following types are

available; TELESPIKE BLOK MODEL TSB (TRIPPE MFG. CO.), SPIKE BLOK MODEL SK6-0 (TRIPPE MFG.

CO.), SUPER MAX (PANAMAX) or MP1 (ITW LINX).

• You can connect an extension phone or a telephone answering machine to the unit after removing the stopper on the

external telephone jack (EXT).

•When you operate this product, the power outlet should be near the product and easily accessible.

NIelpful hint:

If assistance is needed, press _. The unit will print a quick reference.

-11 -

KX-F900 I

INSTALLATION

1. Installing the recording paper

(_) Open the back lid by lifting up the tabs located -

on the both sides, b

(_) Install a recording paper roll in the main unit.

• Make sure that the shiny side of the paper is

facing down and there is no stack, tape, or

glue residue on the paper roll.

,,,,..,....

correct incorrect

2Insert the leading edge of the recording paper

between the recording paper roller and the silver

plate.

Recording paper roller

plate

3Closethe backlid by gently pressing down on both

ends.

Note:

• Only use the included roll of paper or specified recording paper, or else the print quality may be affected

and/or excessive thermal head wear may occur.

•The beginning of some recording paper rollsare secured with glue or tape.

Cut approximately 150 mm (6 inches) from the new roll of paper prior to installation.

2. Installing the paper stacker

Install the paper stacker.

-12-

JKX-F900 1

3. InslailirJg [ne _pa_u battery cover on the main unit

Close the spare battery cover.

Spare battery cover

-I

4. Installing the battery in the handset

1Install the battery as shown observing the

proper polarity. Battery

2Install the battery cover. Battery cover

IKX'FgO0 I

COMPONENT LOCATIONS

Document ........

Feed Roller

Target Glass

Document --

Feed Roller

-- Separation Roller

Recording Paper Cover

Motor

_rmal Head

Recording Paper Roller

Cutter

Mirr

LED Array

Transmission Motor Reception Motor

MAINTENANCE ITEM

1. OUTLINE

MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS ARE PERFORMED USING THE FOLLOWING STEPS.

1) Periodic maintenance

Inspect the equipment periodically and if necessary, clean any contaminated parts.

2) Check for breakdowns

Look for signs of trouble and consider how the problems arose.

If the equipment can still be used, perform copying, self-testing or communications testing.

3) Check equipment

Perform copying, self testing and communications testing to determine if the problem originates from the transmitter,

receiver or the telephone line.

4) Determine causes

Determine the causes of the equipment trouble by troubleshooting.

5) Equipment repairs

Repair or replace the defectiveparts andtake appropriate measures at thisstage to ensure thatthe problem doesnot recur.

6) Confirm normal operation of the equipment

After completing the repairs, conduct copying, self testing and communications testing to confirm that the equipment operates

normally.

7) Record keeping

Make a record of the measures taken to rectify the problem for future reference.

-14-

2-1. MAINTENANCE LIST

REMARKS

NO. OPERATION

1 Document Path

2Rollers

Recording Paper

3Roller

See page 16.

See page121.

4 Thermal Head See page 123.

5 LED Array See page 16.

6 Sensors See pages 77, 78.

CHECK ITEM

Remove any foreign matter such as scrap of paper.

If a roller is dirty, clean it with a damp cloth, then let dry thoroughly.

If the platen is dirty, clean it with a damp cloth, then let dry thoroughly.

Remove the paper before cleaning.

If the thermal head is dirty, clean the printing surface with a cloth

moistened with denatured alcohol (alcohol without water), then let dry

thoroughly.

If the LED array is dirty, clean the glass with a dry soft cloth.

Confirm the operation of the following sensors: recording paper sensor

(SW273), Document sensor (Pi302), Read position sensor (PI301),

Cover open sensor (SW271), and JAM sensor (SW272).

If the mirror and lens are dirty, clean them with a dry soft cloth.

Replace the part. Be sure that all part's screws are tight.

7Mirrors and Lens

8 Abnormal, wear and

tear or loose parts

2-2. MAINTENANCE CYCLE

Cleaning

No. Items Cycle Procedure

1 3 months See P. 16.

Separation Roller

(Ref. No. 58)

Separation Rubber

(Ref. No. 23)

Feed Roller

(Ref. No. 49, 53)

Target Glass

(Ref. No. 171)

Thermal Head

(Ref. No. 59)

Recording Paper Roller

(Ref. No. 112)

3 months

See P. 16.

See P. 123.

See P. 121.

Replacement Remarks

Cycle Procedure

7 years See page 120.

(63,000 documents)

7 years

(63,000 documents)

7 years See page 120.

(63,000 documents)

7 years

(63,000 documents)

7 years See page 123.

(63,000 documents)

7 years See page 121.

(63,000 documents)

These values are only standard ones and may vary depending on

usage conditions.

--15--

KX-Fg00

CLEANING THE UNIT

Cleaning the inside of the unit

If misfeeding occurs frequently, or dirty patterns or black bands appear on a copied or transmitted document, clean

the document feeder rollers, sub roller, rubber flap, white plate and glass.

Disconnect the power cord and the telephone line

cord.

Open the front lid by pressing the front lid open

button.

Clean the document feeder rollers and roller with a

cloth moistened with isopropyl rubbing alcohol, and

let dry thoroughly.

Clean the rubber flap with a cotton swab moistened

with isopropyl rubbing alcohol, and let dry

thoroughly.

Clean the white plate and glass with a soft dry

cloth.

Clean the front lid by gently pressing down on both

ends.

Connect the power cord and the telephone line

cord.

White plate

Rubber fla

Sub Roller

Front lid open button

Document

feeder rollers

Caution:

•Do not use paper products (such as paper towels or

tissues) to clean the inside of the unit.

Cleaning the charge contacts

Clean the main unit and the handset charge contacts with a dry soft cloth once a month, or the battery may not

charge properly.

Charge contacts

--16--

KX-F900

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Page

1. Troubleshooting Summary ..................................................................... 18

1-1. Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 18

1-2. Precautions ............................................................................ 18

2. User Recoverable Errors ....................................................................... 19

3. Detail of Troubleshooting ................................................................. 20~91

3-1. Outline .................................................................................... 20

3-2. Starting up troubleshooting ................................................... 20

3-3. Table of troubleshooting items .............................................. 21

3-4. Easy-check-list ....................................................................... 22

3-5. ADF section ...................................................................... 23-32

3-6. Communication section ................................................... 33-53

3-7. Digital board section ........................................................ 54-67

3-8. Analog board section ...................................................... 68-71

3-9. Power supply section ...................................................... 72-75

3-10. Operation board section ......................................................... 76

3-11. Sensor section ................................................................. 77, 78

3-12. Read section .................................................................... 79-83

3-13. Thermal head section ............................................................. 84

3-14. Cordless section .............................................................. 85~91

4. Programming and Lists .................................................................... 92-97

5. Test Functions ................................................................................. 97, 98

,-I

I-

Ill

,1-

,,-I

Ill

17-

IKX-F900

1. TROUBLESHOOTING SUMMARY

1-1. TROUBLESHOOTING

After having confirmed the abnormal condition by askingthe user, troubleshootaccording to th_ ,_L_U_;L_,,._In

Observe the following precautions whentroubleshooting.

1-2. PRECAUTIONS

1)If there is trouble with the print quality or the paper feed, first check that the installation space and the print

paper meets the specifications, that the paper selection lever/paper thickness lever is set correctly, and that the

paper is set correctly without any looseness.

2) Before troubleshooting, first check that the connectors and cables are connected correctly without any looseness.

Especially, if the abnormality occurs randomly, check very carefully.

3) When connecting the AC power cord with the unit case and checking the operation, exercise utmost care in

handling the electric parts in order to avoid electric shock and short-circuits.

4) After troubleshooting, double check that you have not forgotten any connectors, left any loose screws, etc.

5) And always test to verify that the unit is working normally.

18-

2. USER RECOVERABLE ERRORS

If the unit detects a problem, the following messages will app_af in the display.

KX-F900 I

DISPLAY MESSAGE

:ICALL SERvIcE I

I CHECK COVER I

CHECK DOCUMENT [

CHECK MEMORY

NO RESPONSE

OUT OF PAPER

PAPER JAMMED

POLLING ERROR

REDIAL TIME OUT

REMOVE DOCUMENT

TRANSMIT ERROR

UNIT OVERHEATED

CAUSE AND REMEDY

•There is something wrong with the unit.

• The back lid is open. Close it.

• The document is not fed into the unit properly. Reinsert the document.

If the misfeeding occurs frequently, clean the document feeder rollers inside the unit.

If the problem remains, adjust the feeder pressure,

•Memory (phone numbers, parameters, etc.) has been erased. Re-program.

• The receiving unit is busy or ran out of recording paper. Try again.

• The unit ran out of recording paper. Install a new recording paper.

• A recording paper jam occurred. Clean the jammed paper.

• The other fax machine does not provide the polling function. Check with the other

party.

• The receiving unit is busy or ran out of recording paper. Try again.

• The document is jammed. Remove the jammed document.

• Attempted to transmit a document longer than 600 mm (23%"). Press the STOP button

and remove the document. Divide the document into two or more sheets and try again.

• A transmission error occurred. Try again.

• The unit is too hot. Let the unit cool down.

-I

I1"1

.-.I

¢)

&')

Ill

-19-

iKX-F900

3. DETAIL OF TROUBLESHOOTING

3-1. OUTLINE

Troubleshooting is to make quality and reliability recover by finding out the broken component and exchange or

adjustment or cleaning. We have to find out symptoms and then arrange troubleshooting method.

If it's tough to finding out just a broken component, we should so arrange that block or section are specified, for

example "digital board" or image sensor".

A claim tag from customer or dealer gives us many kinds of expression for same trouble. Because they are not

technician or engineer. But we should carefully read it on our supposition comes from experience, and sufficiently

test the function related to that tag. Returns from customer or dealers often have to claim tag. In this case we need

to find out the symptoms. Therefore please test the unit following simple-check-list. A problem difficult to find out

may lurk, so we need to test repeatedly, for example make copy 10 pages or receiving 10 pages ..........

3-2. STARTING UP TROUBLESHOOTING

•Find out the symptom and troubleshooting method

Power on.

LCD IFchange faitnly

See digital board section.

(See page 54)

LCD good

I 12:00AM I

LCD

II no reaction

No reaction means that power line

is broken (short-circuit).

See digital board section.

(See page 54)

Yes, I know

Not yet

Find out any symptom with

check list (See page 22).

See table of

troubleshooting item.

20-

3-3. TABLE OF TROUBLESHOOTING ITEMS

IKX-F900 1

FUNCTION SYMPTOM SEE THIS PAGE

Unit doesn't work at all No character or faint response in the LCD

Printing

ADF

(Auto Document Feeder)

Paper feed

Skewed sending image

Expanded print

Image is distored

Black or White lateral line on printing

No feed

Paper jam

Multiple feed

Skew

No feed

Paper jam

Multiple feed

Skew

Page 30

Page 27

Page 28

Page

Can not cut the recording paper

Voltage output is abnormal

Keys are not accepted

"PAPER JAM" is displayed

"CHECK COVER" is displayed

Can not fax communicate

Error code is displayed

Can not talk

DTMF tone doesn't work

Monitor sound, volume

Page 23

Page 24

Page 25

Page 26

Abnormal Abnormal sound from the product Page 31

mechanical sound

Cutter Page 29

Power supply Page 72

Operation panel Page 76

Sensor Page 77

Communication

FAX, TEL

(Analog board)

No link

Battery won't charge

No voice reception

No voice transmission

Page 33

Page 68

Page 87

Page 85

Page 86

Cordless

-I

Ill

"1-

-I

Ill

I....Kx-egoo

3-4. EASY-CHECK-LIST

FUNCTION

FAX operation transmission

receiving

Copy operation FINE mode

HALF TONE mode

Monitor sou nd

Telephone operation Ringer sound

Dial operation

Volume operation

REFERENCEJUDGEMENT

OK /NG

VOX detection SERVICE CODE 815

Key check SERVICE CODE 561

LED check SERVICE CODE 557

Operation panel LCD check SERVICE CODE 558

Sensor Sensor check SERVICE CODE 815

Clock

gain correctly?

External TAM Handset Transceiver/receiver compare to your watch.

Remote control

Cordless operation Portable handset Change to FAX receiving by dialing -)(-._

transmission/receiver (Refer to user mode #41 on page 52.)

Link OK J NG

Battery charge OK J NG

-22-

KX-F900 I

3-5. ADF (Auto document feed) SECTION

(1) No document feed

In document setting, confirm

that beep tone or not.

I leaning of separation roller.

( page120 )

Does the separation roller

rotate?

YES

Check the separation spring

and. pad?

_ YES

Replace the separation

roller unit.

,YES

Replace the operation cover

unit.

To digital board

section. (page 54)

Check the separation

spring is distorting.

Check the sensor

lever movement.

,_ oK

Check the sensor

and digital board.

(pages 54 and 77)

OK _ END

__ Check the Motor and J

connector.

NO OK

END

_ eplace the sen- ]

sor lever.

Replace the defec-tive parts.

_ OK? _ Replace the motor

and connector.

Check the gear.

_ Replace the gear.

YES

I Repair.

___ s the phase signal from

pins 73-77 of ICl out-

put?

NO _L

ls the solder at pins 73-

77 of IC1 OK?

I YES

l Replace IC7.

ls the voltage at emitter

of Q1 +24 V?

I YES

II Isthev°ltageatc°llect°r L--_ofQ1+24V?

J Is the voltage at pin 11 of J

IC7 less than 2V? [ N----O---

,_ YES

[ Replace Q1. _1

___ Check power supply

unit section. (page 72)

YES

Replace IC7.

/, _ , I aeplaoe

/END II m°t°r I

OK? I

-I

(/)

-r

-.I

¢)

-23-

KX-FgO0 I

(2) Paper JAM

Check feed route. J

Cleaning the each rollers.

(pages 120 and 121 )

Check each sensors

movement.

Check each rollers

mount.

Check the white plate.

ING

Replacethe white plate.

Checks the paper jam lu_ markings up ubjeui.s stuck on the sheet.

Cleaning or replace of

defective parts.

OK ,END

OK ._ END

Confirms that the location tip of the read start

sensor flag works smoothly.

NO _! Repair or replace the

Isensor lever

IOK

_ END

I Check il the senso_

To Sensor section, reacts while the flag is

(page 77) moving.

Check the separation, feed and pinch rollers are

attached correctly.

>Repair defective parts. -_ END

IOperation-] Wh.ite Plate

cover _ OK

Document

_-'_ NG

Operation Board Cover

Fig. A

-24-

KX-F900 I

(3) Multiple feed

Check separation pad. Confirms whether the pad is dirty or not and

is attached correctly.

Check the separation

spring is distorting.

Cleaning the each rollers.

(pages 120 and 121)

defective parts.

Cleaning or replace the

l eplace the separation

pad, roller and pressure

spring.

OK rEND

OK ._ END

OK . END

Ill

-!-

-I

I'll

25--

(3) Multiple feed

l Check separation pad. [

I heckthe separation [

spring is distorting.

Cleaning the each rollers. I

(pages 120 and 121) I

Replace the separation |

pad, roller and pressure J

spring.

Confirms whether the pad is dirty or not and

is attached correctly.

Cleaning or replacethe I

_1 defective parts.

OK END

OK ,_ END

OK • END

-26-

KX-F900 1

(4) Skew

Document setting OK?

Check feed route.

Checks whether the document is folded or

I ape or staples are attached. Also checks

whether a different size document is set at

the same time.

NO Reset document.

Checks whether there are same foreign

objects, or missing parts.

Check the balance of

both separation pressure

springs.

Cleaning the each rollers.

(page 120 and 121)

Check the white plate.

(Refer to Fig. A of page 24)

Cleaning or replace the

defective parts.

I Replacethe separation ]

pressure spring. I

OK >END

1Replace white plate. ING-'_

END

Check CCD unit.

END

Jepair or replace the

defective parts. IOK END

-.I

-r

.-I

¢}

Ill

f.....KX:-F'O0.......I

(6) Black or white vertical lines appear.

IPlease copy the test chart.

NO_ YES

Cleaning feed route.

Replace white plate,

CCD unit etc.

To thermal head section.

(page 84)

Please the white plate and target glass thoroughly.

If the dirt cannot be removed, change the white plate.

-_ END

To digital board section.

(page 54)

OK END

KX-F900

(7) (.;an noi cu[ the recording paper.

Check the cutter unit. I

Check the each sensor

levers movement.

Check the each sensor.

Test the cutter movement. I

YES

Cleaning the cutter unit.

(page 121)

Replace the defective

parts.

Replace the defective [

parts. I

Check the connector, ]

gear and arm. I

Replace the cutter unit.

END

Replace the motor, gear

and arm.

Replace the digital board. /

-I

-I-

ffJ

29-

i ,x:FoooI

(8) Skewed sending image

Check the setting of

recording paper

NG Reset the recording paper.

I Replace the ]

recording paper roller.

(9) Expanded print

Check the front lid open NG

button locked.

l leaning the each rollers, j(pages 120 and 121)

Lock the front lid open

button.

30--

IKX-F900

(10) When copying u_ printing _,=,abi,u_=ilal sound IS heuld lroll= inu uldt.

In the printing section.

Confirm the EXIT-GUIDE

unit.

I ix/changethe abnormal

part.

In the document convey

-ance element.

(Next page)

Remove the exit-guide toward you by hand and conlim_ it the carriage is moved

by hand.

Confirm if the thermal head, page guide,

recording paper roller, etc. parts are attached

correctly and fix or change the abnormal part.

-.I

I-

I1'1

-t-

,-4

¢)

Recording paper

conveyance. Confirm

the drive section.

Check the drive gear for damage, inserted foreign

objects and also if the pendulum gear spring is

attached correctly.

IFix or change the abnormal

part.

NO Check the other rotation sections, operations,

oscillation sections and fix or change the abnormal

part.

KX-F900 I

Confirm the document's

conveyance drive section.

Re-grease

Check the drive gear for damage, inserted foreign

objects or abnormal instatlations.

NO Fix clean or change the

; abnormal part.

Do not apply large amounts to other parts.

(Refer to page 206)

END

Change the gear and

gear chassis.

-32-

KX-F900

3-b. L;L)MMUNICATION SECTION

Communication connection (modem)

(Print defect in FAX communication)

Symptom

Referring to the printer

(_ Paper is not output

Hint

(_)The picture is out of

order

(_ The picture was cut

off halfway

General Classification

Print a communication TEST : If only the print communication is NG and other

printing is OK, there is a high possibility that

there is a problem in the digital board's modem

and analog board buss.

The transmitted sending side's signal was not received.

If the DTMF tone is not heard, change the IC11

modem.

If the DTMF tone is heard, there is aproblem in the

signal pass route.

Another problem

Confirm the repair method in the DEFECTIVE FACSIMILE

SECTION. (Refer to page 34)

Acommunicationerror Refer to the

has arose. _ error code

/" (Refer to page 41

The sending side's signal was cut during receiving.

Communication error causes :

1. User (unit)

2. Circuit condition

3. Other party (unit)

It is possible that there are other causes than the user.

Try communication in redial a few times.

Also, try communication speed in 4800 bps or lower.

-I

Izl

i,,,=

-t-

-I

Z¢)

¢)

Ill

-33-

l KX-F900

(1) Defective facsimile section

(_) Transmit problem

TX Problem

Paper jam?

1"°

Only some of document

go through?

All of document go

through, but communica-

tion result is error.

I NO

I o feed at all even one

page.

ADF section.

(Refer to page 23)

tUSER STOPPED * Message on LCD

STOP key was pressed?

JNO

•Need to service.

• Operation panel section.

(Refer to page 76)

No problem

I YES

YES ADF section.

(Refer to page 23)

YES

Press down READ SEN-

SOR gently, and release

it to be come up immedi-

ately.

Clean up separation

roller using damp cloth.

And try again.

(Rubbing alcohol)

J NG

Replace separation roller

with new one. J

Need to service

•Check, sensor is in-

stalled properly?

-34 ¸-

IKX-F900

TX Problem ] ransmit Error _ Message on LCD

Pre-Feeding of docu-

ment?

I YES

Doesn't start TX

(Doesn't start feeding?)

_ YES

Document goes through.

Confirm sent image on

RX side has many er-

rors?

OK l

• Increase "596:Transmit

level set" from -10 dBm

to -5 dBm or some.

Ask other party, changing

RX equalizer & increas-

ing TX level•

Using auto dial to send?

Do you press START key

immediately after dialing?

Decrease TX

level from -10

dBm to - 15

dBm or some.

J OK

• Increase "596:Transmit

level set" from -10 dBm

to -5 dBm or

some• or

• Decrease "596:Trans-

mit level set" from -10

dBm to -12 dBm or

some.

NG • Decrease "596:Trans-

mit level set" from -10

dBm to -15 dBm or

some•

IAsk RX party, increase a

parameter of RX error

line value to more than.

(No available) ]

Change "717:Transmit

speed select" to

7200,4800 or 2400 bps.

Check modern TX level.

Change "594: Oversea

DIS detection" to "Detect

at the 2nd time".

I onfirm "592:CNG TX

select" to "ALL". 1

Ask other party, increas-

ing TX level.

YES

Check other party's

machine• (Paper out,

Auto answer off...etc.)

.-I

r"-

(t}

.-I

Ill

-35-

I......Kx_,.oo--]

(2) Receive problem

Confirm below before starting troubleshooting.

• Recording paper is installed properly?

I RX problem

Can RX something anyway?

FAX ring count (#07)is 2,3 or 4?

YES

Change FAX ring count to 1.

Increase "593: Time between

CED & 300 bps" to some

value. l

I Error code No. 68 (Echo)?

YES

Decrease "596:Transmit

level set" from -10 dBm to -

12 dBm or some.

]

YES

Many errors on image?

J No: Looks OK

Increase "595: RX error limit

value" to some•

NO l

t hange"718:Receive speed 1

select" to 7200, 4800 or 2400

bps. l

I Ask sender below change. 1

• Increase TX level•

• Change TX equalizer•

t YES

Change"718:Receive speed I

select" to 7200, 4800 or 2400 I

bps, l

Ask sender below change.

• Increase "596:lransmit

level set"

Confirm below before starting troubleshooting.

CHECK THERMAL PAPER

CHECK COVER

OVERHEATED (doesn't return automatically, COVER OPEN, etc., it is necessary to reset)

PAPER JAM

Please refer to "2. User Recoverable Errors" (Refer to page 19) for the above items.

Also, when it actually becomes a hardware deformity, please check each sensor.

-36-

KX-F900 1

C_ Unit can copy, but can not transmiUreceive

Check solder at-thee--- _

pin 8 of IC10 and Q8.

Connect the unit to the

loop simulator.

Switch : TX side T-R

: Connect oscilloscope

Modem test start

(TEST CODE NO. 554)

Is the four signal at

Tip-Ring output?

1"°

Is the signal at pins

44 of ICl 1 output?

Is the voltage at pin 8

of IC10 24 V?

YES

___connect the PBX and l

EL. line and off-hook. J

YES

YE_S Check the trace

between pins 44 of

IC11 and Tip-Ring.

Check the trace

between T1 and pin

45 of IC11.

-I

.1-

-I

_o_ tlhl lii_a_ It:tniin-_ i _

I YES

Replace IC11. J

Check the solder at

pins 116 of IC1.

Replace IC11.

LKX-F900

@Unit can copy, but can not transmit/receive long distance or international communication

The following 2 causes can be considered for this.

Cause 1:

The other party is executing automatic calling, the call has been received by this unit, and this time until response with a CED

or DIS signal has been too long. (In almost case, this unit detects CNG signal and can respond to CED or DIS.) (According to

the ITU-T standard, the communication procedure is stopped when there is no response from the other party within 35sec, so

that the other party releases the line.)

(Time until Response)

Line Connection

Time

Ringing Time

(about 4 sec/ring)

Other party FAX

machine dials

False ring

i--1 I---1

- .____FaIcslel_1ngeSic?d T1_ e

(about 17 sec depending on the

setting user program mode #30)

Max 35 sec

3 sec I sec

sCEn_Signal _sD_St .gnal

75 msec

Other party

FAX machine

detects the

DIS signal.

(Cause and Countermeasure)

As shown in the above chart, the total handshaking time must be reduced, but because of the long distance connection and

linking of several stations, the line connection time can not be reduced. Accordingly, the following countermeasures should

be tried.

(A) The TEL/FAX DELAYED RING count should be 1. (user parameter: code No. 06)

(B) As the count of 35 sec is started directly after dialing or directly after the START button has been pressed for models

with a START button, the other party should be called manually, if possible.

Another possibility is entry of two pauses at the end of the auto dial number of the transmission side, In this way, the start

time for the count can be delayed by 2 pauses (about 10sec).

Cause 2:

Erroneous detection because of echo or erroneous detection because of an echo canceler.

FAX 1 j/o-J _ FAX 2

_ Station 1 Sl

S2 iStation 2

I S Ii

2 Line Type

The sea bottom cable or satellite

communication path. (4 Line Type)

2 Line Type

(Echo/Echo Canceler)

The signal from FAX1 reaches FAX2 via the stations 1 and 2, but the reflection signal at station 2 also returns via station 1

(echo). As the distance between station 1 and station 2 is long, the echo returns to FAX 1 max. 600msec after transmission,

so than there is the possibility that this signal is detected erroneously as the signal from FAX2 and that trouble is caused. In

the case of a normal call, there is also the possibility that the echo of the own voice will make the call difficult to understand.

For this reason, each station (station 1, station 2) attaches echo cancelers ($1, $2) in case of international lines or long dis-

tance lines. For the echo canceler, the level of the transmission signal from FAX 1 is compared with the level of the reception

signal from the FAX2, and when transmission signal is larger, $1 is closed, while $2 is opened when it is smaller. In other

words, with transmission from FAX1, $1 is closed and $2 is open, so that the echo does not return to FAX1.

-38-

I KX-F900

(Cause and Countermeasure)

(Cause A)

When the training signal is transmitted from FAX1 during the communication procedure at the time of transmission from

FAX1 to FAX2, there is a delay until the echo canceler operates and $1 is closed, so that a part of the head of the training

signal may drop out, normal reception by FAX2 may not be possible, and transmission may not be started.

(Cou ntermeasu re A)

When the international line mode becomes ON service mode (code No. 521), a dummy signal is attached to the head of

the training signal to prevent this problem. As this normally is ON, it is necessary to reconfirm that this has not becomes

OFF. When the international mode is switched OFF, the transmission side will try the training signal three times at each

speed (9600BPS, 4800BPS and 2400BPS), and in case of NG, it will drop the speed by one rank (fall-back). When the in-

ternational mode is switched ON, each speed will be tried only twice. In other words, the slower speed with fewer errors

are reached more easily. This is done as the line conditions may deteriorate and the picture may be disturbed more easily

during communication in case of international lines or long distance communication, even when the training has been OK.

The default value is ON as preference is given to clearer pictures rather than speed.

(Cause B)

The echo canceler operation is stopped with a signal of 2100Hz (i.e. $1 and $2 become ON).

Accordingly, when FAX1 has executed automatic reception, a CED signal is output, and if this signal should be 2100Hz,

$1 and $2 will become ON. Then the echo of the DIS signal output afterwards may be received and FAX1 may execute

erroneous operation, preventing start of communication.

(Countermeasure B)

In service mode, the CED signal frequency is set to 1100 Hz (code No.520) or the time setting between the CED signal

and the DIS signal is set from 75msec to 500msec in service mode (code No.593). This is done because the echo can-

celer operation stop mode is cancelled with an interval of 250msec or more.

(Cause C)

KX-F900 shall be assumed for FAX1 and a set of a different company shall be assumed for FAX2.

In case of transmission from the KX-F900 to FAX2, FAX2 executes automatic reception and transmits a CED signal (2100

Hz), followed by a DIS signal. As here the echo cancelers stops as described in cause B, the echo of the DIS signal re-

turns to FAX2. On the other hand, the KX-F900 detects the DIS signal and transmits a DCS signal. In other words, it is

possible that the echo of the DIS signal and the DCS signal transmitted from the KX-F900 reach FAX2 one after the other,

FAX2 executes erroneous detection, and communication are not started.

(Countermeasure C)

When international DIS detection setting is made effective in service mode (code No.594), the KX-F900 does not respond

to the first DIS signal and returns a DCS signal only for the second DIS signal.

In other words, there is an interval of 250msec between transmission of the first and the second DIS signal, so that the

echo cancelers operation recovers and no echo is generated for the second DIS signal.

Note:

When the other FAX does not respond with a DCS signal after DIS signal transmission, the DIS signal is transmitted three

times for trial.

.-I

I-

Ill

"I-

-I

-39-

KX-F900

Summary:

Long distance and international communication operatio_

SYMPTOM

Does not receive in automatic mode.

Does not transmit.

Does not receive.

COUNTERMEASURE

1. The TEL/FAX DELAYED RING count should be 1.

(user parameter: code No. 06)

2. If possible, manual transmission should be made from

the transmission side.

3. If possible, two pauses should be inserted at the end of

the auto dial number of the transmission side.

4. If possible, the Function Selector Switch should be

switched to FAX.

1. Confirm the international line mode ON.

(service mode: code No. 521)

2. International DIS detection setting is made

effective. (service mode: code No. 594)

1. The time setting between the CED signal and the DIS

signal is set to 500msec. (service mode: code No. 593)

2. The CED frequency is set to 1100Hz.

(service mode: code No. 520)

(_) Unit can copy, but the transmission and reception image is incorrect

(Long distance or international communication operation)

This depends widely on the transmission and reception capability of the other FAX set and the line conditions.

The countermeasures for this set are shown below.

Transmission Operation:

The transmitting speed is set to 4800BPS (service mode: code No. 717) or select overseas mode. (Individual correspon-

dence according to the other set is desirable.)

Reception Operation:

If 80% or more of the reception should be incorrect, set the receiving speed to 4800BPS. (service mode: code No. 718)

-40-

-KX-F900 .....

(2) Communication error functions

(_ Operation:

1. Press the MENU button 3 times.

2. Press the START/SET button and v button 4 times.

3. Press the START/SET button.

4. Print out.

(_ Error code table:

CODE RESULT MODE SYMPTOM Counter-

measure

PRESSED THE STOP KEY

DOCUMENT JAMMED

NO DOCUMENT

PRINTER OVERHEATED

PAPER OUT

THE COVER WAS OPENED

PAPER JAMMED

NO RESPONSE

41 COMMUNICATION ERROR

42 COMMUNICATION ERROR

43 COMMUNICATION ERROR

44 COMMUNICATION ERROR

46 COMMUNICATION ERROR

48 COMMUNICATION ERROR

49 COMMUNICATION ERROR

50 COMMUNICATION ERROR

51 COMMUNICATION ERROR

NO RESPONSE

53 COMMUNICATION ERROR

54 COMMUNICATION ERROR

57 COMMUNICATION ERROR

58 COMMUNICATION ERROR

59 COMMUNICATION ERROR

64 COMMUNICATION ERROR

68 COMMUNICATION ERROR

70 COMMUNICATION ERROR

72 COMMUNICATION ERROR

FF COMMUNICATION ERROR

TX& RX

TX & RX

Communication was interrupted with the STOP button

Document paper is jammed

No document paper

Thermal head is overheated

Out of thermal paper

Cover is open

TX& RX

Recording paper is jammed

Transmission is finished when T1 TIMER is expired 1

DCN is received after DCS transmission 2

FTT is received after transmission of 2400BSP training signal 3

No response after post message is transmitted three times 4

RTN and PIN are received 5

No response after FTT is transmitted 6

No post message 7

RTN is transmitted 8

PIN is transmitted (to PRI-Q) 8

PIN is transmitted 8

Reception is finished when T1 TIME is expired 9

DCN is received after transmission of NSC and DTC 10

DCN is received after DIS transmission 11

300BPS error 12

DCN is received after FTT transmission 13

DCN responds to post message 14

Polling is not possible 15

No response at the other party after MCF or CFR is transmitted 13

DCN is received after CFR transmission 13

Carrier is cut when image signal is received 16

Modem error 12

'--I

TX=TRANSMISSION RX=RECEPTION

-41 -

IKX-F900 I

(_ Countermeasure

I onfirm if the receiver's FAX ma-

chine is set to the reception mode or

answering machine's message is on.

_thlS the receiver's FAXN_

_per or mechanical errorC,-/"

YES

Ask the receiver to set the receiver's

FAX machine to the receivable mode

and transmit again.

f) Transmission is finished when T1 TIMER is expired.

Turn ON the FAX monitor func-

tion and transmit the data to the

same receiver.

Confirm service parameter and

compatibility of both caller's and

receiver's FAX machines.

IYES

Confirm the receiver's FAX machine

was set to the reception mode when

the previous communication was NG.

Confirm the receiver's FAX ma-

chine.

_, YES

Ask the receiver to cancel password

of the receiver's FAX machine or set

the caller's password corresponding

to the receiver's and transmit the

data again.

2 ") DCN is received after DOS transmission.

Confirm service parameter and

compatibility of both caller's and

receiver's FAX machines.

-42-

KX-F900

Modem test

(TEST CODE NO.554)

YES

Perform communication test us- I

ing the LOOP simulator. I

FT-i is received after transmission of 2400BPS

training signal.

(1) Raise the level of transmission. (Do not

raise the level above the standard of each

country. If the communication should be

OK at the level beyond the standard, it is

attributable to line condition or the

receiver's machine sensitivity condition.)

If no effect is obtained.

(2) Slow down the transmission start speed

and taransmit to the receiver again.

Ask the receiver to perform FAX

communication from the re-

ceiver to the caller.

I Perform voice communication I

with the receiver. 1

I heck if the line is not inter-

rupted by noises or in the cross

talk. If it is not, wait until the line

is satisfactory for correct com-

munication.

YES

If this error frequently occurs at

the receiver, perform transmis-

sion in the above-mentioned

mode on the receiver.

YES

End

-I

I-

I'll

'1-

-I

Ill

-43-

three times.

'Inquire the receiver if the

caller's document is facsimiled

correctly.

No response after post message is transmitted

Ask the service section of the

receiver's FAX machine to con-

firm the machine condition.

3.1

) RTN and PIN are received.

-- t

Modem test YES

(TEST CODE NO.554)

6No response after FTT is transmitted.

Perform communication test us-

ing the LOOP simulator and

check the machine reception

condition.

6.1 )

,_ : No problem on the machine hardware.

Perform voice communication I

with the NG caller. I

Check if the line is not inter-

rupted by noises or in the cross

talk, If it is not, wait until the line

is satisfactory for correct com-

munication.

44-

ITry again.

KX-F900 ]

Turn ON the FAX monitor func-

tion and have the receiver trans-

mit the data.

(Receive Complete)

_-_ Decrease the RX speed.

7 ) No post message

YES

Ask the service section of the

sender's FAX machine for ex-

amination.

.-I

I""

Ill

"I-

.-I

NO 7.1 _ _1

( 8 ) RTN is transmitted.

PIN is transmitted (to PRI-Q).

PIN is transmitted.

Perform communication test us-

ing the LOOP simulator and

check the machine reception

condition.

Turn ON the FAX monitor func-

tion and have the receiver in

question transmit the data

again.

( 6.1 )

Modem test

(TEST CODE NO.554)

End ]

-45-

I Kx-F'O0I

Modem test

(TEST CODE NO.554)

Confirm if the receiver's FAX

machine was set to receivable

mode.

(: 9)

Perform communication test us-

ing the LOOP simulator and

check the machine reception

condition.

Turn ON the FAX monitor func-

tion and have the receiver in

question transmit the data

again.

r, 61 )

Reception is finished when T1 TIME is expired.

YES

End ......... }

46-

KX-F900

10 DCN is received after transmission of NSC and DTC.

Confirm if a mechanical trouble

occurred, e.g. transmission was

interrupted or document was out

of place, on the receiver side

(being polled).

Ask the receiver to set the poll

mode again and perform polling.

NO 1

Ask the service section ofihe

receiver/s FAX machine for ex- I

amination. J

,-I

-r

,-I

Ill

(

Confirm if a mechanical trouble

occurred, e.g. the caller inter-

rupted the transmission.

11 ) DCN is received after DIS transmission.

Have the caller transmit the data

again.

Ask the service section of the

caller's FAX machine for exami-

nation.

(12 _ 300BPS error

Modem error

Check the hardware of the pe-

ripherals of the modem.

-47-

Confirm if a mechanical trouble

occurred, e.g. the caller inter-

rupted the transmission.

Ask the caller to transmit the

data again.

DCN is received after FTT transmission.

No response at the other party after MCF or

CFR is transmitted.

DCN is received after CFR transmission.

NO [

6.1 ]

Confirm if a mechanical trouble

occurred, e.g. the receiver inter-

rupted the reception.

Perform voice communication

with the NG receiver.

14 ) DCN responds to post message.

YES

Check if the line is not inter-

rupted by noises or in the cross

talk. If it is no, wait until the line

is satisfactory for correct com-

munication.

l ......

Ask the receiver to set the

receiver's FAX machine to the

receivable mode and communi

cate again.

48-

I......Kx-_90o........I

(

Confirm if a mechanical trouble

occurred, e.g. transmission was

interrupted or document was out

of place, on the receiver side

(being polled).

Ask the receiver to set the Poll

mode again and perform polling.

15 ) Polling is not possible.

____ mr • 1

Ask the service section of the /

receiver's FAX machine for ex-

amination.

IXII

I'" I

ill I

t_l

.-,,,

Cl f

lModem test

(TEST CODE NO.554)

( 16 -) Carrier is cut when image signal is received.

Perform communication test us-

ing the LOOP simulator and

check the machine reception

condition.

( 6.1 )

49_

KX-F900

(3) Remote programming

While a user is talking on the phone, a technician call set the function parameters of customer's unit from service center.

1. A call comes in service center.

2. A technician gets a claim from a customer.

3. He says to the customer "Please change to the speaker phone if talking with the portable handset. And then please press

MEMU button and wait for a moment".

4. The technician dial '9,0,0,0, _' from his telephone.

The customer's unit is set REMOTE PROGRAMMING MODE and generates remote beep sound.

He hears "Piiii' (one long beep).

5. He presses 3 digits code of service function written in service manual by dial keypad. (See page 52)

And presses _ (set).

The customer's unit receives the service code.

He hears "Piiii" (one long beep).

6. He presses 1-3 digits value of function written in service manual by dial keypad.

And presses _ (set).

The customer's unit receives the service value.

He hears "Pii Pii" (double short beeps).

7. Then he can repeat from step 5.

8. When a technician wishes to end the REMOTE PROGRAMMING MODE, he says to the customer,

"Please press the STOP button to exit the REMOTE PROGRAMMING MODE. And then press the SP-Phone button".

Note:

1) To enter the REMOTE PROGRAMMING MODE is necessary in Step 3. Because the unit can not easily enter the

REMOTE PROGRAMMING by DTMF signal from the other party.

2) If he presses wrong buttons when his operation is in step 5 or 6. he hears "Pii Pii Pii" (triple short beeps). Then he can

repeat from the same step.

3) When customer's unit finishes transmitting a list (No. 991,992, 994,999), he can have a voice conversation.

And he can continue the REMOTE PROGRAMMING MODE.

4) When customer's unit start transmitting a list (No. 991,992,994,999), he does not hear "Pii Pii" (double short beeps).

The unit generate CNG sound.

50-

KX-F900

1_ Summary of remote programming mode

sTART

Enter the REMOTE

PROGRAMMING ID 9,0,0,0 *

I ress mistaken key "PiiPii Pii"

Iress mistaken key"Pii t

Pii Pii"

REMOTE PROGRAMMING

MODE "Piiii"

Press 3 digits code of service

function and then press -_ (set)

SERVICE SETTING MODE

"Piiii" l

Press 1-3 digits value of func-

tion and then press -X- (set)

SETTING THE FUNCTION "Pii

Pii"

Customer press STOP

key and press the

SP-PHONE button.

END J,-I

I-

"1"

--I

-51 -

[ KX'FgO0 I

C_)Program mode table

002

003

0O4

005

007

008

009

012

021

022

023

024

025

030

031

039

040

041

046

070

O8O

501

502

503

520

521

522

523

544

550

551

553

554

555

556

557

558

559

56O

561

562

563

57O

571

572

573

Function

Set date and time

Your Io.qo

Your telephone number

Print transmission report

Auto receive mode

FAX ring count

Manual receive mode

TEL/FAX delayed ring

Remote TAM activation

Logo position

Journal auto print

Overseas mode

Junk mail prohibitor

Delayed transmission

Silent FAX recoqnition rin.q

Rin.q detection

LCD contrast

Silent Detection

Remote FAX activation code

Friendly reception

FAX pager

Set default

Pause time set

Flash time set

Dial speed set

CED frequency select

International mode select

Auto standby select

Receive equalizer select

Documentfeed positionadiustmentvalueset

Memory clear

ROM check

Monitor on FAX communication select

Modem test

Scanner test

Motor test

LED test

LCD test

Paper jam detection select

Cutter select

Key test

Cutter test

CCD position adjustment value set

Break % select

ITS auto redial time set

ITS auto redial line disconnection time set

TEL ring count

Set Value Default Remote setting

mm/dd/yy hh:mm

ERROR

FAX

1 ring

TEL

1 ring

OFF/ID=I 1

OUT

OFF

OFF/ID=22

OFF

3 rings

OFF

NORMAL

ON/ID= •

OFF

O50

2100

OFF

61%

014

030

1:ERROR/2:ON/3:OFF

1:FAX 2:EXT TAM

1 to 4 rings

1:TEL, 2:TEL/FAX

1 to 4 rings

1 :ON/2:OFF

1 :OUT/2:IN

1 :ON/2:OF F

1 :ON/2:OFF

ON/OFF

3 to 6 rings

0:OFF/1 :A/2:B/3:CI4:D

NORMAL!DARKER

1:ON/2:OFF

ON/OFF

1:ON/2:OFF

ON/OFF

YES/NO

001 ~600X 100msec

01~99X 10msec

1:10/2:20pps

1:2100/2:1100Hz

1:ON/2:OFF

01-99 step

"START" push

1:OFF/2:P-B/3:ALL

"START" push

I:ON/2:OFF

1:ON/2:OFF

Press any key

"START" push

00-30 mm

1:61/2:67%

00~99

001 ~999

01~99

-52-

KX-F900

.... Function ........

590 FAX auto redial time set

591 FAX auto redial line disconnection time set

592 ONG transmit select

593 Time between CED and 300 bps

594 Overseas DIS detection select

595 Receive error limit value set

596 Transmit level set

700 Ext. TAM OGM time

701 Silent detect time

702 Ext. TAM ring count

717 Transmit speed select

718 Receive speed select

719 Ringer off in TEL/FAX mode

721 Pause tone detect

722 Redial tone detect

732 Auto disconnect cancel time

763 Friendly reception CNG detection select

771 T1 timer

815 Sensor check

844 Original setting

909 Handset remote FAX ACT

991 Transmit basic list

992 Transmit advanced list

994 Transmit iournal report

999 Transmit service list

Set Value

00-99

001-999

1:OFF/2:ALL/3:AUTO

1:75/2:500/3:1 s

1:1stJ2:2nd

001-999

-15~00dBm

01~99 sec.

01-99 x 100 msec

0-9

1:9600/2:7200/3:4800/4:2400bps

1:ON/2:OFF

1:350msec/2:1800msec/3:OFF

1:10S/2:20S/3:30S

1:35sec/2:60sec

"START" push

I:NORMAIJ2:LIGHT/3:DARKER

0-9, ,_ 2-4 digits

1:START

Default

O45

All

75ms

1st

100

-10

9600bps

350msec

20S

35sec

NORMAL

Remote setting

-I

"1"

.--I

ill

OK : Can set the valve by remote programming featureor print list

NG : Can not set the valve.

-53-

KX-F900

3-7. DIGITAL BOARD SECTION

• How to fix the digital board that don't start up the unit.

(1) OVER VIEW

If you see a human being down on the street, what will you do?

You may talk to him. But if he doesn't answer, you check his breath or pulse, don't you.

Why do we check them? Breath or pulse, we needs must do it to live. We start to check from most basic things to live.

Checking (or repair) the Board doesn't work is similar to it.

We should start to check from most basic things to work.

What is most basic to work?

1. POWER SUPPLY (+5V, +24V)

2. SOLDERING of ICs

3. OSCILLATOR (CLK) (SYSTEM CLK: 24MHz, MODEM CLK: 24MHz)

4. RESET

5. SIGNALS

ADDRESS BUS (A0~A15)

DATA BUS (D0-D7)

READ, WRITE (RD, WR)

CS (Chip select) (ROMCS, MDMCS)

"Board doesn't work" means that board has any problems in these most basic things.

This document is going to explaining the order of repair with flow chart at first and then explaining individual point of

those items in detail.

MEMO --

MDM: modem (modulator/demodulator)

CLK: clock

ROM: read only memory

RAM: random access memory (SRAM: static RAM. DRAM: dynamic RAM)

RTC: real time clock

adr: address

RD: read

WR: write

54-

[-....KX-FgO0-]

(2) CHECK LCD ON THE MACHINE

If the digital board had broken, machine does not react at all and black square will be on the LCD.

There are 5 processes to display some letters (12:00 AM) on LCD.

IIf processes were not complete, black square will be on the LCD. ]

1. POWER ON

2. OSC

3. RESET

NG If defective is in the power

line, LCD doesn't change.

NG black square

4. Read the data in the ROM

(program start)

5. Make peripherals initial

black square

LCD J

LCD

IDDDD

LOD

IBDDD I

LCD

[FIDDD

LCD

LDDDD

-I

r-"

-1-

-I

LCD

12:00 AM 1

Monitoring (KEY IN) 1

-55-

I x, ,0o1

(3) PROCEDURE FROM OUR EXPERIENCE TO FIX

plug the AC cord IPower ON J

-,,-- No reaction

LCD

Black squares or any charactor come.

•-_ Check

power line

I(Refer to page 58)

No reaction means that Power line is

broken (short-circuit).

Turn over and take

bottom cover off.

Oscilloscope

[]

[] r_ O

GND

BE CAREFUM

• This is the TEST with AC power on.

RESET is fixed at 5V

Is pin 101 of ASlC 5V?

not 5V

like a wave form below

Check the voltge of

testing points.

(Refer to next page) rCheck detail.

(Refer to page 58)

56-

KX-F900 j

Pleas check the status (voltage) of pin 56, pin 58 and pin 60 of IC1.

These status may tell you defective point. (Please use the ROM for IC status checked) [Ref No. EC22]

Oscilloscope or TESTER

DDDDD

[] m0 0

This could be

defective point

SRAM

IC3

MODEM

ICll

OPE.PANEL

IC301

Thermal Head

TEMP.

Cordless

ALL OK

status (voltage) of check points

IC1 (ASIC)

pin 56

pin 58 pin 60

0v 5v

5v 5v

0v 0v

0v 5v

5v 0v

0v 0v

Please check here!

R68,R69

IC3,1C1 (pin 48)

IC11 (pin 95, pin 116),1C11 ,L2.,L5,RA1 ,RA2

R39,C87

IC1 (pin 14-17, pin 20)

R79-R86

R47~R49, C37-C39

IC1 ( pin 38, pin 49)

Note: If the thermal head temperature is

abnormal, "CALL SERVICE" will appear in

the dispaly.

Change the Cordless Base unit P.C.B.

-I

I--

Ill

"1-

-I

¢)

Ill

Please check soldering and conduction of these components.

If it is no problem, replace ICs.

If you still have problem, please go to "3-1 check detail" (page 58).

-57-

iKX-F900 ]

(1) CHECKING DETAIL

Please check the soldering first, it comes from our experience.

Checking soldering

Big ICs and resistor arry

IC1 RA1, RA2

IC3 RA3, RA4

ICll

Visual check soldering.

Checking soldering

SYS. CLK (pin 96 of ICl) 12 MHz?

CPUCLK

XTEST

Check wave form on the

ICs and BUS line.

(Refer to page 60)

Replace IC.

(2) POWER SUPPLY (5V, 24V)

(_ With AC power off

Please check Short Circuit of power line.

1. 5V line at CN1 between pin 6 and 4 pin, is it short?

2. 24V line at CN1 between pin 2 and 3 pin, is it short?

(_) With AC power on

Please check voltage of power line.

1. 5V line at CN1 between pin 6 and 4 pin is 5V?

2. 24V line at CN1 between pin 2 and 3 pin is 24V?

KX-F900

(3) OSCILLATOR (CLK)

SYSTEM CLK: 24 MHz, MODEM CLK: 24 MHz

24 MHz SYSTEM CLK

(pin 96 of ASIC:IC1) 5V

•This point is 1/2the MHz of the

SYSTEM CLK 12MHz. 0V

50 nsec/div

24 MHz MODEM CLK

(pin 70 of MODEM:IC11) 5V

•This point is 1/2the MHz of the

MODEM CLK 12MHz. 0V

50 nsec/div

(4) RESET

RESET signal makes system initial state just after power on.

If RESET signal is defect, please check IC11 and components that is connected to these ICs.

.-I

rrl

¢/)

-r

-I

¢)

Check _ voltage 5v?

power line 5V pow_n_J

RE-CET

(pin 101of ICl : ASIC)

reset time apx. 175msec

4.3msec

NG 0v

This wave form means another problem, it is not caused by RESET circuit

Please see the item : "CHECK WAVE FORM"

-59-

[KX-F900

(5) CHECK WAVE FORM

This check needs 4 channels digital storage oscilloscope higher than 400 MHz.

I START ]

JYES

I heck again power line,

oscillation (12 MHz),

RESET?

Address to SRAM or

MODEM may unsuceedo

(Refer to pages 63-65)

If still no reaction replace

ASlC and check again.

__ o0a0e6

._ Activetermo,_-_-6-E_n_ ,_ent,y_'_L

l 1 no problem

Check operation panel I/F

Check the lines that connect to CN5

from ASlC (IC1).

If no problem on the lines replace

ASIC (ICl).

Address to SRAM or

MODEM may unsuceed.

]

Refer to pages 63~65. /

Watch dog error frequently

makes RESET active because

address or data is confused

by any problem on Address,

Data bus.

Check bus line

• short circuit

• open

• voltage

-60--

KX-F900 ]

Let's observe the wave form to fix the defective IC.

Please observe A0, DO, ROMCE, RD by using digital oscilloscope.

Below graph show you the wave form that is observed when unit

(.board) is working correctly. Both graph are good wave. Wave

form is rapidly changing by one (like below graph). Because many

kind of data or program are rapidly executed,

so you can see some kind of wave forms that is seem to below

graph.

name

ROMCE

SRAMCS:

MDMCS

location

pin 132 of ASlC (IC1)

pin 131 of ASlC (IC1)

pin 22 of ROM (IC2)

pin 24 of ROM (IC2)

: pin 20 of SRAM(IC3)

: pin 54 of MODEM(ICl 1)

CH1 5V/div'

CH2 5V/div

CH3 .5V/div

CH4 5V/div

W1 500ns/div

Length 100

W2 b_sldiv

^Length lk

_amp=mg Normal

20Msps

Marker 1

T -13.75p.s

V 5.0 V

Marker 2

VT 70520p_

W21

&T 21.25tus

I/&T 47.06kHz

z_V -4.8 V

Time

Time Base I Roll

I Off

H1 W1 i { !

0.0v___ A0

ROMCS

Time/div

Time Base

External

]

-I

"1-

-I

Ill

CH1 5V/div

CH2 5V/div

OH3 5V/div

CH4 5V/div

Wl 500ns/div

Length 100

W2. 5ps/div

Length lk

sampling Normal

20Msps

Marker 1

T -13.751_s

V 5.0 V

Marker 2

T 70.5Op._

aT 21.25_s

1/&T 47.06k Hz

_V -4.8 V

Time

Timel_Base I

HIWI i t

10.0V_ _ A0

: : i

i ! : i

........ i................. ;...... . i :

Ro:cs ...........i..........................:................

: : i

RD _

Roll

Off I

Time/div

Time Base

External

-61 -

[.....Kx-Fgoo....]

The graphs below show you the wave form that is observed when unit (board) doesn't work. (A3 is intentionally opened at

pin 135 of ASIC in this board.)

Please check that active (low level) term of ROMCE is longer than good wave form, **ROMCE is active (low level) except-

ing RESET is active.** and RESET is frequently coming on every 4 msec.

In the case of this wave form ASlC (ICl), ROM (102) or on the way of bus line route is possibly defect. If soldering, con-

ductance is no problem, we need to replace these ICs.

CH 1 5V/div

CH2 5V/div

CH3 5V/div

CH4 5V/div

Wl 500ns/div

Length 100

W2 51_s/div

A Length lk

;sampling Normal

20Msps

Marker 1

T9_,.651_

Marker 2

AT -2.15p.s

l/AT 465. lk Hz

AV 0.2 V

Time

Time Base I Roll

I off

'1'Trigger _" CH1/2 z_ MEM1A MEM2

H1 W1

10.0V_ A0

: i :

i i RoMcs _ :

........ i ........ ::........ i ..................... r_!iongi ........ i........ i ...... :

i i ! : i

RDi i

Time/div

lime Base

External

CH1 5V/div

CH2 5V/div

CH3 5V/div

CH4 5V/div

Wl 1ms/div

Length 100

W2 10ms/div

Length 1k

Sampling Normal

10ksps

Marker 1

T 576.5ms

V 4.8 V

Marker 2

T 15.0ms

V 0.2 V

AT -561.5ms

l/z_T 1.781 Hz

AV -4.6 V

Time

Time__Base I

tTrigger _CH1/2 AMEM1 &MEM2 Time/div

H1 Wl oWl

10.0V_ i A0

ili ii! i--;............................................

• ..... . W2 '_l_4=l_

: Time Base

DO ;

_:i i'i ...... _ "'_" !i'"'_ _: "'i' i_ External

RO_ICS

::: ...... ::' ]oo::10ngi =................................. _: NG

:Ft$_ :

-40.0V

575.0ms i 585.0ms

o":t I I I I

-62-

Please observe A0, DO, ROMCE, MDMCS.

Below graph show you the wave form that is observed when ullit (board) is wuiking _,uJtuutiy.

i KX-F900

_oth graph are good wave.

CH1 5V/div

CH2 5V/div

CH3 5V/div

CH4 5V/div

Wl, 51xs/div

Length lk

W2. 51zs/div

^Le,.ngth lk

bamp,ng Normal

20Msps

Marker 1

TV 20985.801a_

Marker 2

TV 705OIJ._

li_l'l_.-]

AT -2091.30p, S

l/AT 478.2 Hz

z_V -4.6 V

i'Trigger _'CH1/2 z_MEM1AMEM2

H1 W1 :

10.0V A0

D0_ i _

ROMCS i !

MDMCS

-40.OV : : :

2083.20Fs i 2133.20ps

;;"1 t I I

Time/div

Wl_

Time Base

External

F- .....

t O

i J

, m

I m

: [/]

-1"

-I

Ill

CH1 5V/div

CH2 5V/div

CH3 5V/div

CH4 5V/div

Wl. 5p,s/div

Length 1k

W2. 511s/div

^Length lk

bamplmg Normal

20Msps

Marker 1

vT23700 %

Marker 2

T 7.50#s

V 5.0 V

z_T -2369.20ps

l/z_T 422.1 Hz

z_V 4.6 V

Time

Time__Base t

HI Wl

10.OV_ _ AO

tTrigger OCH1/2 z_MEM1 &MEM2

DO i : i

i ! ! i i i

ROMCS

i i i i i i

! MDMCS : :

-40.or "

2384.60gs 243,_.60gs

F:loll I

o. 1 I

Time/div

Time Base

External

-63-

[KX-Fg00

The graphs below show you the wave form that is observed when MODEM doesn't work. (Oscillation is not intentionally

supplied to MDM.)

Please compare OK form to NG form.

MDMCS (pin 54 of ICl 1) signal is coming many times more than good wave form.

In the case of this wave form MODEM doesn't work. If soldering, conductance is no problem, we need to replace MODEM

(IC11).

CH1 5V/div

CH2 5V/div

CH3 5V/div

CH4 5V/div

Wl 5ps/div

Length 1k

W2 511s/div

^Length 1k

_ampJing Normal

20Msps

Marker 1

vT 3520951i_

Marker 2

z_T

l/AT

H1 W1

I0.0V_

fTrigger _CH1/2 z_MEM1AMEM2 Time/div

_o% ROMCS

-345.451is _2.895k Hz

4.8 V

! MDI£1CS i ! i i

: ,,,

Time

Time Base ] Roll

l off II

Time Base

External

many MDMCS

CH1 5V/div

CH2 5V/div

CH3 5V/div

CH4 5V/div

S Lengtl

ampling Normal

20Msps

Marker 1

vT _%.9_

Marker 2

Tv75_°_v

AT -345.45pS

l/aT 2.895kHz

AV 4.8 V

Time

Time Base

H1 Wl

10.0V A0

i : i i i

! MDMCS ! :

.................iz0°.many__

-40.0V

1347.40#s i ;1397_.40#s I

I I

Time/div

Wl_

Time Base

External

-64-

I KX-F900

Below graph show you the wave form that is observed when SRAM doesn't work. (BUS line at SRAM is intentionally

opened.) Please compare OK (under) to NG (upper). SRAMCS (pin 20 of IC3) signal is coming like clock.

In the case of this wave form SRAM access doesn't work. If soldering, conductance is no problem, we need to replace

SRAM (IO3).

CH 1 5V/div

CH2 5V/div

CH3 5V/div

CH4 5V/div

Wl 51_s/div

Length 1k

W2 51u,s/div

^ Length lk

_amp,ng Normal

20Msps

Marker 1

Tv t372_..0._

Marker 2

AT -1364.90ps

1/_T 732.7 Hz

z_V -4.8 V

Time

Time__Base I

H1 W1

10.0Vi

Roll

Off

tTrigger _'CH1/2 zxMEM1AMEM2 Time/div

SRAMCS

Time Base

External

Like clock

-I

-4

CH1 5V/div

CH2 5Vtdiv

CH3 5V/div

CH4 5V/diM

Wl 21_s/div

Length 400

W2 5tls/div

Length 1k

bamp,ng Normal

20Msps

Marker 1

vT,37 :00.

Marker 2

AT -1364.90ps

l/AT

732.7 _z

AV 0.0

Time

Time__Base I

H1 W1

10.0V_ A0

i : i

......................... ,...... : i i

ROMCS............................i................i........

SRAMCS :: : i :

-4o.ov

1362.:40Fs 1382-:.40ps

;,I'1 I I L

Time/div

Time Base

External

KX-F900 I

(6) CHECK SOLDERING

We should check soldering at first.

Because many problem are caused by a defective soldering.

I How to Visual-Check the soldering I

Defective soldering (shorted, un-welded, oxidized...) doesn't have a good looking outward.

In order words outward (gloss, brightness, form) is important for soldering. So we should do visual inspection.

IA basis of soldering is skirfl I

Smooth skirt is shaped by surface tension as melting cream solder in reflow machine or lifting P.C. Board

from DIP.

Section of Soldering Skirt

SMT (QFP. SOP) parts : ASIC, MDM, SRAM

skirt

SMT (PLCC) parts : CODEC

./__ skirt

i |

Leaded parts Chip parts Resistor array

sJirt

66-

KX-F900

COLD (nu-welded) SOLDERING

CHIP PARTS (section)

cold soldering

LEADED PARTS

(section)

cold soldering

SMT PARTS

cold soldering

RA RESISTOR ARRY

cold soldering

-I

I-

I'll

-I-

,-I

I'tl

SHORTED SOLDERING

SMT PARTS

shorted

LEADED PARTS

II I} (secti°n)

shorted

CHIP PARTS

-67-

I .....I

3-8. ANALOG BOARD SECTION

For example ] Returns from the custorner has 2 of the defects.

complaint

X HANDSET transmitting

X SP-PHONE transmitting

How can you repair this unit?

We usually check the signal flow with the circuit schematic.

(If defect is only one item, we check only one of the signal routes.

Maybe something is defective on that route.)

If there is more than one defect, you need to check some of the routes.

At first, you should check the area where there are common components on

these signal routes.

Please see the check sheet (next page).

KX-F900 ]

(SYMPTOM) ,

ITEMS TO CHECK J

SP-PHONE Tx _ I

[SP-PHONERx

I Portable

Handset Tx

signal ROUTE

IN # I_ OUT

MIC-J270-C 138-1C109(13-27)-R145-1C 151 (75-63)-C203-R210-1C201 (2-1)-C202- R201 -T101 -

TEL LINE

TEL LINE-T101 -R202-C205-1C201 (6-7)-C210-C173-R172-R 173-C174-1C 151 (59-71)-C142-R 143-

IC109 (22-30)-C145-1C109 (4-7)-R146-C146-1C151 (40-38)-R245-C245-1C241 (4-5,8)-SPEAKER

-- _RTABLEHANOSETMIC_R283_C214_Q208_C233_R232_IC202(19_17)_C232_R231_IC202(16_13)_R230_

R228-R227-1C202(11-10)-C225-R229-VR201 -R458-R410-TX VCO-R459-C412-R460-1C401 (4-2)-

C409-C408-Q402-C405-Q401 -L422-FL401-L421-C492-L406-ANTTENA- RFUNITL306-C392-L319-

FL302-Q304-C322-Q303-C328-1C301 (23-13)-FL303-Q305-C338-1C302(16-3)-FL304-1C302(5-9)-

R322-R335-CN301 (3)- CORI)LIFSSBASEUNITCN502(3)-VR501-C540-R593-Q511-R505-C553-C536-R579-

R578-R577-1C502(2-5) R576-C534-R575-R562-R561 -R557-R558-C561 -L506-CN501 (5)- ANALOGOOARD

CN153(5)-R 160-Cl 59-1C151 (50-63)-C203-R210-1C201 (2-1)-C202-R201 -T101 (2-5)-C 109-R116-

Q101-D 101-R102-L105-R101-POS101-TEL JACK

Portable

Handset Rx

DTMF Speaker

monitor

I DTMF for TEL LINE

FAX Tx

I Beep for TEL LINE

I Dummy Ring

Back tone

ANALOG8OAROTEL JACK-POS101-R101-L105-R102-D101-Q101-R116-C109-T101 (5-2)-R202-C205-

IC201 (6-7)-C210-C173-R172-R173-C174-1C151 (59-35)-C193-CN153(6) -coRDLEssBASEUN,TCN501 (6)-

L507-C571-R553-C572-C518-1C502(21-20)-C568-R569-1C502(19-17)-R570-C522-1C502(16-13)-

R571-R573-R574-1C502(11-10)-C537-R581-R582-VR502-CN502(10)RF UN,TCN301 (10)-R358-R310-

TX VCO-R359-C312-R360-1C301 (4-2)-C309-C308-Q302-C305-Q301-C303-FL301-C354-C392-

L306_ANTTENA_PORTABLEHANDSETL406-C492-C491-L419-FL402-L420-Q404-C422-Q403-C428-

IC401 (23-13)-FL403-Q405-C438-1C402(16-3)-FL404-1C402(5-9)-R432-R435-V R202-C235-R224-

R223-1C202(2-5)-R225-C217-1C203(3-4)-C259-R247-C238-R234-1C208(4-5, 8)-SPEAKER

{IC11 (44)-T- C73-rR90-1C 10 (6-7)-CN 1(10)}-CN271 (10)-C184-R184-1C 151(76-41)-C158-

L_C74-J

R161-1C151 (40-38)- R245-C245-1 C241 (4-5,8)-S PEAKER

{IC11 (44)--[--C73TR90-1C 10 (6-7)-CN 1(10)}-CN271 (10)-C 184-R 182-1C151 (73-63)-C203-R210-

t_ C74.J

-IC201 (2-1)-C202-R201 -T101 -TEL LINE

{ICl (86)-CN1 (11)}-CN271 (11)-R185-C186-1C151 (77-63)-C203-R210-1C201 (2-1)-C202-R201-T101-

-TEL LINE

{IC1 (85,87)-[- R59-C56TCN2(1 )}-CN272(1 )-R186-C187-1C151 (78-63)-C203-R210-1C201 (2-1)-C202

/R60-C57 .J

-R201-T101-TEL LINE

-.,I

:;0

i"-

"I-

-I

t--

I Ringing I '

I Alarm/Beep/Key tone _-

CNG /DTMF/VOX I

detection

FAX Rx

{IC1 (85,87)- r- R59-C56-[-CN2 (1)}-C N272(1 )-R186-C187-1C 151(78-41)-C158-R161 -IC151 (40-38)-

LR60-C57 J

R245-C245-1C241 (4-5,8)-SPEAKER

{IC1 (86)-CN1 (11)}-CN271 (11)-R185-C186-1C151 (77-41)-C158-R161-1C151 (40-38)-R245-C245-

IC241 (4-5,8)-SPEAKER

TEL LINE-T101 -R202-C205-1C201 (6-7)-C210-C212-R215-C213-1C202(1-2)-C217-CN271 (9)-

{CN1 (9)-R97-1C 10(2-1 )-C82-R95-1C 11 (45)}

Note:

69 { }: digitalboard

iKX-F900

(1) Defective ITS (Integrated telephone system) section

€_)No speakerphone transmission/reception

Following the ITS section or NCU section, search for the route between the microphone and

the telephone line (sending) or between the telephone line and the speaker (receiving) where the signal disappears.

Check the components at that point.

_) No pulse dialing

IDoes the voltage at 3 pin of

IC151 change between high

level and low level?

I YES

Check the pulse dial circuit.

INO

IReplace PC102. I

Does the voltage at 3 pin of IYES I

IC151 change between high

level and low level?

I,I

Replace PC102 or R281.

Check IC151.

(_) No ring tone

LCheck the Bell detection

circuit. 1

Is the Bell detection circuit

OK?

YES

Does a ring tone I,,^

signal appear at 44

pins of IC11 (digital

board)?

YES

Replace IC11.

Following the ITS section and search

for the point on the route between

the modem and the speaker where

the signal disappears.

Check the components at that point.

(_ No tone dialing

Does a DTMF signal appear

at 44 pins of ICll (digital

board)?

YES

Following the NCU section and ITS section

and search for the point on the route between

44 pins of IC11 and the telephone jack.

Where the signal disappears.

Check the components at that point.

Replace IC11.

-70-

I KX-F900

(2) Defective TAM interface section

(!) Not arriving in TAM, FAX turn on.

_sthe installed bell ring num-

ber of TAM less than that of

KX-F900?

I YES

Check the EXT. TAM Hook

detection circuit.

RL101, VAR1, R103, PC105

NO -,nstal,a be;, ringnumber oi I

TAM less than that of KX-F900. I

(_ A FAX is coming but won't switch from TAM to FAX

Printing? I YES '1

l"°

Is the FAX from the other [ NO SOUND

party CNG or no-sound? /

Check the path to the modem input and refer

to the TAM INTERFACE SECTION.

See the CHECK SHEET and SCHEMATIC.

Wait. I

Check VOX circuit and refer to the

TAM INTERFACE SECTION.

See the CHECK SHEET and SCHEMATIC.

-I

Ill

"1-

.-I

¢)

(_) A voice is coming in but switches to FAX

Check the VOX circuit and refer to the

TAM INTERFACE SECTION.

See the CHECK SHEET and SCHEMATIC.

Hint: You can monitor the VOX signal on service mode 815.

When a VOX (sound) is detected, "Vx" will be shown on the LCD.

71-

KX-F900

3-9. POWER SUPPLY SECTION

(1) Key components for troubleshooting

The following components have been known to break frequently :

F101, D101, Q101, IC101, D201, D202

This comes from our experience of experimental test. For example : power supply,

lighting surge voltage test, withstanding voltage test, intentional short circuit test .....etc.

Caution:

If you find a melted fuse in the unit, don't turn the power on without repairing the unit first. (Except the fuse.)

If you do the fuse will melt again. It has not been repaired. The cause exists same where else.

Because of circuit compostion :

If 24V is not output, don't output.

In most cases (our experience) the symptom is that nothing is output.

There is a high possibility in the primary side more than the secondary side.

POWER SUPPLY BLOCK DIAGRAM

•, primary secondary .

AC INP_ Rectifier

circuit

Over

current

circuit

C°cnrveuir_ing

Q101

T101[ 24v17

output

circuit

DC-DC

converter

circuit

Voltage feed

back circuit

OUTPUT

+24V

GND

-- +5V

DUMMY LOAD to check voltage

CN302

5V 1

25£2 <4 5V _+5%

2W :!

1200Q.

l W 24.5V + 4%

GND

24V

CN301

24V

24.5V + 4°/o (_

GND

5V+5% (

(_ :VoltageMeter

-72-

KX-F900 I

(2) Troubleshooting flow chart

Our recommendation for troubleshooting is as follows.

This procedure comes from our experience of troubleshooting in our lab.

•_Before turning on the power supply, you should check F101.

R I FI !"

I R I DI I.

• r

l 1 1

(Next Page)

,-I

-I

1:3

73-

k _x:_,ooJ

YES

R I Ill.

5V,check ___

(DC-DC converter check)

YES

5V,check

(DC-DC converter check)

Replace D201. J

YES

Replace

D202,PC101 and IC201.

I_v,che_ _-.(DC-DC converter check)

YES

5V,check

NO (DC-DC converter check)

---_ Replace the whole board. J

(It is difficult to fix by testing other parts.)

-74-

I _vcheck 1

I I

Replace D203.

Replace IC202. J

J ReplaceD204. I

Replace peripheral circuit of IC202

(3) The broken parts repairing details

[- --KX-Fg00 ..... J

(D101)

Check short-circuit of terminal 4. It D101 is short-circuited, F101 will be melted (open). So in this case,

replace the 60th parts (D101, F101).

(Q101)

The worst case of Q101 is a short-circuit between the Drain and Gate because damage expands to IC101.

This is due to of very high voltage through the Gate circuit which is composed of D104, R107, R114 and

R121. Then you should change all of the parts listed as follows:

F101, Q101, D104, R107, Rl14, R121, IC101.

(IC101)

Occasionally, it exists as the sole case of a broken IC101. You should exchange.

(D201)

If D201 is broken, the oscillation circuit of the power supply cannot operate. Check it with an electric tester.

(D202)

Occasionally, this part short-circuits. In this case, you can listen to the click sound of intermittent oscillation*.

Check the resistance between 24V and GND.

*Intermittent Oscillation:

This happens when the power supply balance is broken and loads as a perfect open or short-circuit of

output. The graph of Intermittent Oscillation is shown as follow.

-I

I'"

131

"I"

"-I

¢)

rrl

,,No0sc=llatl0n[ ,,

_, [*-Oscillation

75--

I KX:F,001

3-10. OPERATION BOARD SECTION

(1) No key operation

I Key always pressed?

Is the

[_o

Check disconnection of CN5

(digital board) or CN301

(operation board).

t YES Repair the keys.

Check IC301

(operation board)

(2) No LCD indication

[

Is the disconnection of the

cable and connector between

the LCD and Operation board

OK?

YES

Replace the LCD.

Check IC301.

NO Repair.

76-

[........Kx-Fgoo

3-11. SENSOR SECTION

(1) Check the read position sensor(PI301)

Check the voltageat pin 15 of IC301

Document set OV -L--When the pin

No document 4-5V !-_ 16 of IC301 is

low level.

Replace IC301, J

N__2%,.

Check the soldering at R333.

(2) Check the document sensor (PI302)

Check the voltage at pin 15 of IC301

Document set 4~5V -_---When the pin

No document OV --9 of IC301 is

low level.

Replace IC301. I

--_ Check the at R333. ]OK

soldering I

Check the soldering /

at R331. /

Replace PI301.

Check the soldering

at R332.

Replace PI302. f

i'-

'-r.

,-4

(3) Check the cover open sensor(SW271)

Check the voltage at pin 31 of IC151 _ Check the soldering at R271.

Open cover:4~5V /

Close cover: 0V

ReplaceIC151. J

Check the soldering

at R272

ReplaceSW271.

KX-Fg001

(4) Check the recording paper sensor (SW273)

Check the voltage at pin 6 of IC151

Present recording paper: 0V

Out of recording paper: 4-5V

Replace IC151.

-_ Check the soldering at R275. _ Check the soldering at R276. I

Replace SW273.

(5) Check the jam sensor (SW272)

Check the voltage at pin 7of IC151

jam: 0V

No jam: 4-5V

Replace IC151.

-_ Check the soldering at R273. _,_ Check the soldering at R274.

Replace SW272.

--78-

3-12. READ SECTION

)'sthe0'asssur'aceo,rea,,,r,0sect,onC,ear,thesu,,aceo,the0,ass.Ic,ean?

IPerform the scanner test. Copy a document. /

_°_

lEND

LED lamp of the read section light? I-,

(Service code : 555)

YES NG

(Next page) l

Is the voltage at pin 62 or ICl 4~5V?

IYES

l ls the voltage at

pin 16 of IC7

0.6-7V?

YES

I hecklC1 orre-

place IC1.

Replace IC7.

Check the connection between CN7 I

and LED lamp. I

IReplace lamp.

Is the voltage at pin 1 of CN7 +24V?

KX-F900

-.,I

::0

"1"

,-I

Check the

pattern between

IC7 and CN7. NO ,{ Repair the connection. i

79-

IKX-F900

Is the amplitude at pins 2~5 of CN6

4~5 Vp-p?

YES

Is the voltage at pin 1 of CN6 +5 V?

YES

Check power supply

section.

(Refer to page 72)

Check the waveform of CCD and read

section. (Refer to page 82)

Take out cable from CN6, and _NG

check the amplitude at pins 2~5

of CN6 (4~5 Vp-p).

Check CCD board.

(Refer to page 81)

Check the solder at pins 50~53 of IC1.

I OK

Replace IC1. I

-80-

KX-F900 J

[-Pe"0;m the scanner test. (Refertopage 97_) 'I

I Is the amplitude at pins 2~5 of CN801 (CCDboard ) 4~5 Vp-p?

I YES

Check the waveform at pin 7 of

CN801 (CCD board).

(Refer to page 83) NG

END

Check the waveform

at pin 1of IC801

(CCD board).

(Refer to page 83)

Replace Q801, Q802,

Q803 (CCD board), or

perform CCD adjust.

Take out CN801 (CCD board), and check the

amplitude at pins 2~5 of CN6 (Digital board).

I Check the short at pins 2~5 of

0N801. (COD board)

NG Check R_O.

(4~5 Vp-p).

Check the solder at pins 50-53

of IC1 .(Digital board)

Replace IC1. I

Check R830.

ING

Replace R830. (CCD board)

Replace IC801. (CCD board) }

=01

001

r" i

rnl

(/)1

C_l

81-

waveform of read section

CH1 GND

CH2 GND --

® CCD

._ a! about

1.0 Vlmp

Oscilloscope setting

V: CH1 0.5 V/div

CH2 5 V/div

DC couple, CHOP mode

H: 1 msec /div

Trigger: CH2 SLOPE (+)

Probe point: GND Test point "AG"

CH1 Test point "VID"

CH2 Test point "FTG"

Waveform: _ CHI CCD signal

(_) CH2 FTG: GATE signal (trigger)

Note: This waveform will be shown when the CCD reads

the white plate of document cover.

-82-

IKX-F900

U.b V/div

AC couple

0.5 V/div

AC couple

1 V/div

DC couple

GND

about

1.5V

NO.

(_-1

(_)-2

CH1 probe point

IC801 pin 1 (CCD Board)

0N801 pin 7 (CCD Board)

IC1 pin 39 (AMON) (Digital board)

about

0.6Vp.p

I about

1.0Vp-p

1.5V

-I

83-

I......KxFgo0-I

3-13. THERMAL HEAD SECTION

Is the voltage at pin 8 of CN251.

(Analog Board) 0-1 V? (When copying)

I YES

Is the voltage at pins

5,6 of CN301 23~24 V? (Power unit )

YES

Is the amplitude at

pins 1, 4-7 of CN11

4N5 Vp-p? NO

YES

Is the amplitude at pins

1~3 of CN 11 4~5 Vp-p?

YES

Check the cable of CN11

and CN301. (Power unit)

Replace thermal head.

Check switching power

supply section.

(Refer to page 72)

I s the voltage at pin 119

of IC1 4-5 V? (Digital

Board)

YES

Checkthe solder at pin

119 of ICl or pin 8 of

I CN251.

Take out CN11 and check the

amplitude again.

OK 1

Check the solde at pins

22, 25-28 of IC1 or re-

place IC1. (Digital Board)

Check the voltage at pin

38 of IC1,3V (0%) >V__2V

(65%) about 2.6V (25%).

I ,

Check IC1. J

Take out CN11 and

check the amplitude

again.

Check the solder at pins--/7/

23, 24 of IC1.

Check R47, R48, R49,

C37, C38 and C39.

Replace the thermal

head.

-84-

3-14. CORDLESS SECTION

/KX-F900

(1) Battery won't charge (Cordless Base unit)

Plug inthe AC power source.

Is the charge LED lit?

_YES

I Is the voltage between(_and012 V? I

I Check D503,R535,R534.

_._ Isi-_ v(_tage-oi Q505]NO[ Check{he .......

I collector about _ charge circuit

I 5.6 V? II (Refer to page 172)

IYES

Is the voltage of

pin 37 of MPU

4.1 V?

IYES

Is pin 24 of MPU

4.9 V?

l_ heck around J

MPU (IC501).

_YES

Does the MPU clock INOI

oscillate? r-l

IYES

Check around LED.

Is pin 20 of

MPU HIGH?

_YES

Check around

Q512.

-.I

IzI

rrl

'-r

-I

(2) Battery won't charge (Portable handset)

Check the contact between

the battery pack and the

Portable handset.

Is the voltage at cathode of

Diode D201 about 4.0 V?

Note: When charge after

removing the battery.

IYES

Check the battery.

Check L203, D201, L202 |

and D214. J

85-

IKx:F,oo.....I

(3) No voice reception

Does the modulation

factor become 6.4 kHz

Devi. when -27 dBm is

input to the base unit?

Is there an output

waveform at pin 6 of

CN501 ?

IYES

Is there an output

waveform at pin 10 of

IC502?

_YES

Check RF unit

(cordless base unit).

....................... -_YES

__ Check theAnalog board.

._ heck around I

IC502.

Is there an output

waveform at pin 5 of

IC202 (Portable handset)?

_YES

Is there an output

waveform at pin 8 and

5 of IC208?

I YES

Check SPEAKER.

....

it, VR202

d IC202.

___ Check around

IC208.

(4) No voice transmission

Does the microphone of the

portable handset work. ._ Check around the

microphone.

IYES

Dose the modulation factor

become 5.0 kHz Devi.

When -40 dBm is input to

the portable handset

microphone terminal?

INo

Is there an output waveform I.ol

the co ector of Q208? on]

I I

IYES

Is there an output

pin 10 of IC202? waveform at NO

IYES

Check RF part (portable

handset).

Check around

Q208.

Check around

IC202.

YES

Is there an output

waveform on the

drain of Q511 base

unit?

I YES

| !

Is there an output at NLN_

pin 5 of IC502?

I YES

Is there an output at I

pin 5 of CN501? I

I YES

Check the Analog

borad. 1

_._ heck RF unit,

Q511.

Check around

IC502.

KX-F900

(5) No link

(_)How to check whether the portable handset or the cordless base unit

_) Link condition

ILINK FAILURE I

Charge another OK portable handset

in cordless base unit; link OK?

Charge portable handset in another

OK cordless base unit; link OK?

PORTABLE HANDSET NG

(Set the test mode)

[Referto item (3) of page 108]

CORDLESS BASE UNIT NG

(Set the test mode)

[Refer to item (3) of page 111]

1. Transmitting power OK? (Cordless base unit: -9.0 + 4 dBm; portable handset: -7.5 dBm + 4 dB)

2. Transmitting frequency OK? (CH1 cordless base unit: 902.1 MHz + 4 kHz; portable handset:926.1 MHz + 4 kHz)

3. Reception OK? (CH1 cordless base unit: 926.1 MHz ; portable handset: 902.1 MHz, f--1 kHz, MOD=5 kHz DEV)

4. SQL (20 dB detection) signal OK? (When SG is ON: "high"; when SG is OFF: "Low")

5. Transmittion link data OK? (cordless base unit: 744 Hz and 425 Hz frequencies mixed; portable handset: 372 Hz

and 270 Hz frequencies mixed)

6. Reception link data OK? (portable handset: 744 Hz and 425 Hz frequencies mixed; cordless base unit: 372 Hz

and 270 Hz frequencies mixed)

_) Analysis of defect locations

I Set the test mode I

(_ _ _ YES

Transmittingpower OK? INO

1_ _ _ YES

Transmitting frequency OK? I NO

_) __LyES

I ReceptionOK? ] NO

(_ __ YES

SQL (20 dB detection) signal OK? I NO

(_ 1 Base Unit: lC501pin 5 J

,_ Handset: IC201 pin 49

YES

ITransmittion link data OK? JNO

I I RF Unit: pin 10 MOD signal I

(_ +YES

I Reception,inkdataOK? I NO

Base Unit: IC501 pin 6 I

Handset: IC201 pin 50

YES

! Cordless base unit and 1

portable handset link test.

High level-

Base Unit: Approx 5V

Handset: Approx 4V

(Check TX VCO voltage,

+B signal and VTX signal.)

(page 88)

(_ (Check TX VCO voltgae.)

(page 88)

(Check RX VCO

voltage and VRX signal.)

(page 88)

> @ (Check 20dB adjustment

value.)

(page 89)

('_ (Check microcomputer

data sending signal line.)

(page 89)

(_ (Check RX data signal line.)

(page 89)

-I

(t)

"1-

-I

Ill

-87-

FKX-F900

Check TX VCO voltage,

+B signal and VTX signal. /

RF unit I NO

(+B = "high"?) I

(VTX = "high"?)

YESi-'_

TX VCO voltage OK? I NO

TX VCO voltage

Base Unit: 1.3V_+O.5V

Handset: 1.3V_+O.5V

(page 87)

I Check signal line. I

I Check TX VCO circuit.

[

I heck RST. SI, CPS

and LD signal lines.

-- - High level ....

Base Unit: Approx 5V

Handset: Approx 4V

Check TX VCO voltage.

I"° I

TX VCO voltage OK?

TX VCO voltage

Base Unit: 1.3V _+0.5V

Handset: 1.3V -+0.5V

(page 87)

Check TX VCO circuit. I

Check RST, Sl, CPS I

and LD signal lines. I

[

Check RX VCO voltage and I

VRX signal. I

RF unit

(VRX = "high"?)

YES_ "_

I I

RX VCO voltage OK?

YES I TX VCO voltage

Base Unit: 1.3V + 0.5V

Handset: 1.3V _+0.5V

(page 87)

NO • Check VRX signal line. I

Check RX VCO circuit.

Check RST, SI, CPS

and LD signal lines.

-- High level--

Base Unit: Approx 5V

Handset: Approx 4V

-88-

KX-F900

fCheck 20 dB adjustment

value.

When SG is ON, RF

unit pin 7 SQL = "low"?

(or "C" mark lights)

YES

When SGisOFF, RF _

unit pin 7 SQL = "high"? I °

(or "C" mark goes off) |

(page 87)

Readjust to 20 dB. 1

IIs re-adjustment possible? t-_

IYES

•RF unit

•Check peripheral circuits of

cordless base unit (IC302 pins 10, 11; D301, D302)

portable handset (IC402 pins 10, 11; D401, D402).

•RF unit

•Check peripheral circuits of

cordless base unit (IC302 pins 10, 11; D301, D302)

portable handset (IC402 pins 10, 11; D401, D402).

_____

(/)

-!-

-I

6")

c::

ill

iCheck microcomputer data I

sending line. I

RF unit pin 10 MOD NO

signal = "data waveform"

OK?

(page 87)

Check cordless base unit IC501

pin 44 and portable handset IC201

pin 51-54 lines.)

Check RX data line.

RX data signal OK?

•Cordless base unit :1C501 pin 6

-Portable handset :1C201 pin 50

(page 87)

r•Check cordless base unit IC503 peripheral circuits.

•Check portable handset Q214, Q215 peripheral circuits.

- 89-

i 1....

(_) (No link (Portable handset TX)

IS the data wave,orm input to NOl_ch-el i aio i-ndQ-20 _-

pin 14 of CPU during charging_i v

IYES

Does LED _ight up when the

TALK switch of the portable

handset is pressed.

IYES

Is the data of the portable

handset output from CPU?

Check R250.

_IYES

Check RF part. J

_ heck around

battery, IC206 and

IC201.

Is pin 49 of CPU NOLNLNLN_ Check around 1

H, H? i i I

_YES

Check around I

pins 51-54 of CPU. I

(_) No link (Portable handset RX)

Is signal output to Q214

collector when the data signal

is sent from the base unit?

IYES

Is signal output to pin 50

of IC201?

IYES

Does pin 49 of CPU become

LOW when a signal is input?

IYES

.{ heck RF part, Q214

and Q215.

_ Check around IC201 'l

Check around

NOISE AMP.

Check around CPU.

90-

KX.F900-- 1

6_ No link (Base unit RX)

Is the ID data output from N_O -Check Q506 and

CONT terminal during charging? l°l MPU.

i i

IYES

Is the data signal output to pin 3 iNOI

of RF unit drain during _ Check RF unit.

conversation with the portable

handset?

JYES /|

Is the data signal output to ]NC) I

pin 4 of IC503? [I

IYES /

Does pin 5 of MPU become INO

LOW when a signal is input? F"

IYES

Check around

IC503.

Check around

NOISE AMP.

..N

r- ;

.-I

i'-

Check around MPU.

(_No link (Base unit TX)

I .

Does the TALK LED flash I ,,,,-, I

when the page key is

pressed?

IYES

Is there data output of the I NOI

base unit from MPU? FICheck pin 44 of MPU.

IYES

Check RF unit.

Check around the

MPU.

Is pin 5 of MPU

HIGH?

IYES

Check around pin

44 of MPU.

Check around

NOISE AMP.

-91 -

KX-F900 -- j

4. PROGRAMMING AND LISTS

The programming functions are used to program the various features and functions of the machine, and to test the

machine. Programming can be done in both the on-hook and off-hook conditions. This facilitates communication

between the user and the service while programming the machine.

4-1. OPERATION

There are 2 basic categories of programming functions, the User Mode and the Service Mode. The Service Mode is

further broken down into the normal and the special programs. The normal programs are those listed in the

Operating instructions and available to the user. The special programs are those listed only here and not displayed

to the user. In both User and Service Mode, there are Set Functions and Test Functions. The Set Functions are

used to program various features and functions, and the Test Functions are used to test various functions.

The Set Functions are accessed by entering their code, changing the appropriate value, then pressing the SET key.

The test Functions are accessed by entering their code and pressing the key listed on the menu. While programming,

to cancel any entry, press the STOP key.

4-2. OPERATION FLOW

User mode _ (1) TEST mode _ PRINT mode (prints out the list to confirm

I Programming I I (user programmable)%_(2) SET mode __ the set values)

[.Service mode _ Normal (3) SET mode _ PRINT mode (prints out the

(not user programmable) Special _ (4) SET mode list to confirm the set values)

(5) TEST mode

Operating Procedure

MENU button ]

LCD

I SYSTEM SET UP

Iser mode _'z-

I _-- LCD

I SETUPITEM[ ] I

Follow the instructions on the LCD.

_ Code

I-_ D [[] XXXXXXX

(Some codes are for the Test Functions, while others are for the Set Functions.)

LCD

User mode #MENU buttonI--'-I MENUbutton ----IPRINTLIST ----I START/COPY/SETbutton I----I','buttonI

Printout i START/COPY/SETbutt0nI_LCDsIc LIST/ADVANCEDLIST j_ I

Code Follow the instructions on the LCD.

Service m°del--_ 1-9] I_-I F] r-6-ii--_--i-T--_ D D D xxxxxxx

l/ (some are for the Test Functions some for the special

codes

I / Set Functions, while others are for the Set Functions.)

/ /

LCD _ ISetvalue = __

I H--,'51-• l Pr nt out

-92-

4-3. USER MODE (The list below is an example of the SYSTEM SETUP LIST the unit prints out.)

I BASIC FEATURE LIST I

NO. FEATLI_

#01 SET DATE & TIME

#02 YOUR LOGO

#03 YOUR TELEPHONE NUMBER

#04 PRINT TRANSMISSION REPORT

#05 AUTO RECEIUE MODE

#OT FAX RING COUNT

#88 MANUAL RECEIVE MODE

#09 TEL/FAX DELAYED RING

#12 REMOTE TAM ACT.

CLI_ENT SETTING

JAN. 01 199G 12:00AM

ERROR ]ERROR,ON,OFF]

FAX [FAX,EXT. TAM]

1 [I...4]

TEL ]TEL,TEL/FAX]

1 [I...4]

OFF CON,OFF]

_' Code

ADVANCED FEATURE LIST

NO. FE-_TURE

#21 LOGO POSITION

#22 JOURNAL AUTO PRINT

#23 OVERSEAS MODE

#25 BELAYED TRANSMISSION

Code #30

#31

#39

#40

#41

]

ID = 11

_'_SetValue

CODE =

#46 FRIENDLY RECEPTION

#20 FAX PAGER

DESTINATION =

CtJ_ENT SETTING

OUT ]OUT, IN]

ON ION,OFF]

OFF ION,OFF]

OFF ION,OFF)

DESTINATION =

START TIME =12:00AM

SILENT FAX RECOGNITION RING 3

RING DETECTION OFF

LCD CONTRAST NORMAL

SILENT DETECTION ON

REMOTE FAX ACTIUATION CODE ON

OFF

#80 SET DEFAULT \

Set Value

[3...6]

[A,B,C,D,OFF]

]NORMAL,DARKER]

ION,OFF]

CON,OFF]

[ ON, OFF ]

ION, OFF]

Note:

The above values are default

iKX-F900

4-4. SERVICE FUNCTION TABLE

Code Function

501 Setting of pause time

502 Setting of flash time

503 Setting of pulse dial speed

520 Setting of CED frequency

521

522

Setting of international line mode

Setting of return to default mode

523 Setting of reception equalizer

Selection of document

544 feed position

550 Memory clear

551 ROM version and sum check

Set Value

001~600X100msec

01~99X10msec

1 : 10 pps

2 : 20 pps

1 : 2100 Hz

2 : 1100 Hz

1 :ON

2 " OFF

1 :ON

2 : OFF

1 :ON

2 : OFF

01_99 step

EffectiveRange

001_600

01_99

1,2

01_99

Default

05000msec

700 msec

10 pps

2100 Hz

OFF

Remarks

Selects the pause time in 100

msec step.

Selects the line break time during

flashing in 10 msec step.

Sets the pulse dial speed.

When international communica-

tions cannot be performed

smoothly, select 1100 Hz.

Selects the international line mode

during of FAX communication.

Sets the resolution and contrast

conditions of FAX or copy return-

ing to the default.

When a station is quite a dis-

tance from the unit or reception

cannot be performed correctly,

set to "ON".

When ADF function is improper,

adjust feed position. (8step=lmm)

Press "STA RT/COPY/S ET".

Press "START/COPY/SET".

1 " OFF To monitor the line signal with

553 Setting of FAX monitor function 2 : PHASE B 1,2, 3 OFF the unit's speaker during FAX

3 : ALL communication or not.

554 Modem test "START" press.

555 Scanner test "START" press.

556 Motor test "START" press.

557 LED test "START" press.

558 LCD test "START" press.

Selects the jam detection of

559 Setting of document jam 1 • ON 1,2 ON document during FAX

detection transmission/copying.

560 Cutter select 1,2 ON

561 KEY test Press any key.

562 Cutter test "START" press.

563 CCD position adjustment 00_30X 1 mm 00_30 _ Lets you select the correction

value set value for main scanning direc-

tion of the dislocated scanner.

1 : 61% Sets the % break of the pulse

570 Setting of the % break 2 : 67% 1 2 61%

' dial.

2 - OFF

1 ON

2 : OFF

-94-

571

Function

Setting of number of times

that ITS is redialed

572 Setting of ITS redial interval

573 TEL ring count

590 Setting of number of times of

FAX redial

Setting of FAX redial interval

591

r .........1

592

Set Value

593

00_99

001_999 sec

01_99

0_99

001_999 sec

1 : OFF

Designation of CNG sending 2 : ALL

3 : AUTO

Setting of interval between

CED and 300 bps signal.

594 Setting of overseas

DIS detection

Setting of the acceptable

value of reception error

595

596 Setting of transmit level

1 : 75 msec

2:500 msec

3 : 1000 msec

700 EXT TAM OGM time

701 Silence detect time

702 EXT TAM ring count

717 Transmit speed select

718 Receive speed select

1 : Detects at the

1st time

2 : Detects at the

2nd time

001_999Xnumberoftimes

-15_00

x second

x 100 ms

x number of rings

1 : 9600 BPS

2 : 7200 BPS

3 : 4800 BPS

4 : 2400 BPS

1 : 9600 BPS

2 : 7200 BPS

3 : 4800 BPS

4 : 2400 BPS

EffectiveRange

00_99

001_999

01 _99

00_99

001_999

1,2,3

1,2

001_999

-15_00

01 _99

0_9

1_4

14 times

030 sec

15 times

5 times

045 sec

ALL

75 msec

Detects

at the

1st

time

100

-10 dBm

10 sec

5O ms

5 times

9600 BPS

Remarks

Selects the number of times that

ITS is redialed (not including the

first dialing).

Sets the interval of ITS redial.

Sets the' number of rings that

unit starts to receive a docu-

ment in TEL mode.

Selects the number of times of re-

dial during FAX communication (not

including the first dialing).

Sets the interval of FAX redial

during FAX communication.

Lets you select the CNG output

during FAX transmission.

ALL: CNG is output at phase A.

AUTO: CNG is output only when

the automatic dialing is per-

formed.

OFF: CNG is not output at phase

Sets the interval between the

CED signal and subsequent

300 bps signal.

Sets the recognizing format of DIS

signal.

1: Detects the first DIS signal sent

from the receiver during FAX

transmission.

2: Ignores the first DIS signal sent

from the receiver during FAX

transmission.

Sets the number of error ac-

ceptable lines when the FAX re-

constructs the received data.

Selects the FAX transmission

level.

(Increase the level when the

telephone line condition is poor.)

Sets the start time of silence de-

tect.

Sets the silence of call confir-

mation times.

Sets the number of rings that

unit start to receive a document

in EXT-TAM mode.

Adjusts the speed to start train-

ing during FAX transmission.

Adjusts the speed to start train-

ing during FAX reception.

-95-

I......KX-FO00--1

Code

719

721

722

732

763

771

815

844

909

Function

Ringer off in TEL/FAX mode

Pause tone detect

Redial tone detect

AUTO disconnect

CNG detect time

T1 timer

Sensor check

Original setting

Handset Remote FAX Actication

Set Value

1 :ON

2 : OFF

1 :ON

2 : OFF

1 :ON

2 : OFF

1 : 350 ms

2 : 1.8 sec

3 : OFF

1 : 10 sec

2 : 20 sec

3 : 30 sec

1 : 35 sec

2 : 60 sec

Effective Range

1,2

1,2,3

1,2

Default

350 ms

20 sec

35 sec

1 : NORMAL

2 : LIGHT

3 : DARKER

0-9,

1,2,3

2N4 digits

NORMAL

Remarks

Selects ringer off switch when

a call is received in the TEL/

FAX mode.

Selects the tone detection in

the pauses of the dialing.

Selects the tone detection

mode after redialing.

Selects the start time of detec-

tion of auto disconnect.

Selects the CNG detect time

of friendly reception.

Set to the higher value when

the response from the other

party needs much time during

FAX transmission.

"START" press.

Use this feature when you

need to transmit and copy a

document with very faint writ-

ing on very dark writing.

You can change the remote

FAX activation code using the

portable handset.

96-

4-5. SERVICE MODE SETTING VALUES (Example of a printed out list)

Kx oo ......1

[SERVICE DATA LIST]

.,_.--Code _,./SetValue

501 PAUSE TIME = 050_100ms

502 FLASH TIME = 70_10ms

503 DIAL SPEED =iBpps

520 CED FREQ. = 2100Hz

521 INTL. MODE = ON

522 AUTO STANDBY = ON

523 RX EQL, = OFF

524 TX EQL. = OFF

700 EXT, TAM OGM TIME =10s_c

701 SILENT DETECT TIME = 50_100msec

702 EXT. TAM RING COUNT = 5

909 HANDSET REMOTE FAX ACT.= _

ISPECIAL SERVICE SETTING ]

544 553 559

/" 50 1 1

Code _"SetValue

594 595 596 ?iT 718 719 T21

1 100 10 1 1 1 1

[001...600]_:lUSms

[Ol,.,99]_lOrnS

[1=10 2=20]pps

[1=2100 2=i100]Hz

[1=ON 2=OFF]

[I=ON 2=OFF]

[01...99]s_c

[01...99]_100ms_0

[0...9]

560 563 570 521 572 573 590 591 592 595

115 1 14 030 15 05 045 2 1

722 732 763 771 844

1 1 21 1

-N

.I-

-N

¢)

Note:

The above values are default

5. TEST FUNCTIONS

Test mode

PRINT TEST

MOTOR TEST

MODEM TEST

ROM CHECK

SCAN CHECK

LCD CHECK

Type of Mode

User mode

Service Mode

oCode [--1[_

• Operation after

code input.

START

N@N

START

NN@

START

[]F Fq

START

BBB

START

Function

Print a test pattern and check the thermal head for

abnormalities (missing dots, etc.), and also check the

operation of the reception motor.

Rotate the transmission and reception motors to check the

operation of the motors.

Send four kinds of FAX signals to check the sending function

of the modem.

1) 1100 Hz: Consecutive signal of EOM for tonal.

2) 2100 Hz: G2 carrier signal

Consecutive of CED signal

3) G3, V29 training signal [modulation wave of carrier signal

(1700 Hz)]

Indicate the version and check sum of the ROM.

Turn on the LEDs of the image sensor and operate the read

system.

Check the LCD indication.

Illuminate all dots to check if they are normal.

-97-

lKX-F900

DTMF SINGLE

TEST

LED TEST

KEY CHECK

FACTORY

SET

CUTTER

TEST

SENSOR

CHECK

Service Mode

UB[]

1..On

2..Off

@NN

START

{any

key }

NN@

START

®[][]

START

Output the DTMF by single tone.

All LEDs flashes on and off, or is illuminated.

Check the operation button.

Indicate the button code at LCD while the button is pressed.

Clear the memory in which the user can store data.

Check the cutter operation.

CHECK SENSOR OPERATION

IDo Sn Co Ja Pa Vx Cu ]

Do : Document Sensor

Sn : Read Position Sensor

Co : Cover Open Sensor

Ja :Jam Sensor

Pa : Recording Paper Sensor

Vx : Vox Sensor

Cu : Cutter Position SW

: LCD DISPLAY

: Paper inserted

: at the read Position

: Cover open

: Jam

: Set Recording Paper

: Vox detected

: Home Position

5-1. BUTTON CODE TABLE

Code

Button Name Qx_

RESOLUTION 0D

AUTO RECEIVE 0E

START/COPY/SET 16

MENU 18

Button Name Code Button Name

/k VOLUME 35 5

V VOLUME 36 6

ERASE 37 7

NEWMSGS.PLAYBACK 38 8

Code Button Name

3E FLASH

87 STATION 1/6

88 STATION 2/7

89 STATION 3/8

8A STATION 4/9

8B STATION 5/10

09 LOCATOR/

INTERCOM

HELP 19 MAIL BOX 39 9

SP-PHONE 31 1 3A 0

MUTE 32 2 3B

LOWER 33 3 3C #

DIRECTORY 34 4 3D REDIAL/PAUSE

-98-

KX-F900 1

ADJUSTMENT

Page

1. Table of Test Equipments and Tool ................................................. 100

2. Adjusting the Feeder Pressure ......................................................... 101

3. Confirmation of Separation Spring ................................................... 101

4. CCD Adjustments ..................................................................... 102~104

5. Document Read Start Position Adjustment .............................. 104,105

6. Codless Adjustment .................................................................. 107~113

t,_

,-I

Ill

'-'1

99--

iKX-F900 I

1. TABLE OF TEST E_UIP'MEN1-5 AND TOOL

Main Unit (FAX)

No. Test Equipment and Jig Name Jig No.

1 Oscilloscope

2 CCD Tool PFZZ1 F780M

3 Extension Cord PQZZ2K12Z, PQZZ8K18Z

4 Spring Height Tool PFZZ2F780M

Portable Handset (Cordless)

No. Equipment

1. Radio Tester : Marconi Model 2295A or later.

2. 4.5 digit Digital Multimeter : B&K Model 2833 or compatible.

3. Oscilloscope, single or dual channel : Panasonic VP-5512P100 or compatible.

4. Telephone Analyzer : B&K Model 1050 or compatible.

5. DC Power Supply, capable of supply 3.9V DC at'100mA

NOTE : only needed if Telephone Analyzer does not have DC VOLTS output available.

6. High Frequency Attenuator, 10dB or greater.

7. Corded Telephone.

8. High Frequency Cable : BNC end to open end.

9. Audio Cable : BNC end to alligator clip end.

10. High Frequency Adjustment Tool:

11. Isolation Capacitors, quantity of 2, 10 #F maximum, 50V DC or greater.

12. Soldering Iron, solder, and various tools.

-100-

2. ADJUSTING THE FEEDER PRESSURE

I KX-F900 J

If misfeeding of document, such a multiple feeding or no feeding, occurs frequently, try to adjust the feeder pressure by

following steps below.

.--Lever

(1) Open the front lid by pressing the front lid open.

(2) Shift the position of the lever by using an instrument

with a pointed end, like a clip or ball-point pen.

Position A: Select this when documents do not feed.

Position B: Standard position (pre-selected)

Position C: Select this when documents multiplefeed.

(3) Close the front lid by gently pressing down on both ends.

3. CONFIRMATION OF SEPARATION SPRING

Front lid open

button

SPRING HEIGHT TOOL

(PFZZ2F780M)

Fig. 1

NO TOUCH

SEPARATION SPRING

1. Open the operation grille.

2. Check the highest level of the separation spring with the

spring height tool (PFZZ2F780M). Please make sure that

the separation spring does not touch the tool during this

operation. (Both right and left) (See Fig. 1).

3. Check the lowest level of the separation spring with the

opposite side of the spring height tool. Please make sure

that the separation spring touches the tool during this

operation. (Both right and left) (See Fig. 2).

t,..

.-I

SPRING HEIGHT TOOL

(PFZZ2F780M)

Fig. 2

TOUCH

SEPARATION SPRING

-101 -

IKX_-F900 - I

4. CCD ADJUSTMENTS

Perform the following adjustment after replacing tens and CCD board.

PREPARATION:

1) Remove the CCD unit from set. (Referto page 120. )

2) Make oscilloscope connections as shown in next page.

3) Attach the CCD TOOL on the CCD unit.

4) Connect between CCD unit and dlgital board with extension cord (Part No. PQZZ8K18Z). (Refer to next page).

5) Connect between LED array and digital board with extension cord (Part No. PQZZ2K12Z). (Refer to next page).

6) Connect AC cord.

7) Press the MENU button.

8) Press the #,9,0,0,0, and • buttons.

9) Press the 5,5 and 5 buttons.

Notes:

1) Install the lens so that the marking (RED) on it is upper side.

2) Do not touch the glass face of the lens with the bare hands.

3) If you have no instrument to repair, trim off the chart on

page 97, then attach on the target glass (This is atemporary

treatment. You should use an instrument for this adjustmen

purpose, ifyou require an accurate repairment.)

Cleaning:

If the lens is dirty, clean it with a dry soft cloth.

Chart

/CCD Tool

(PFZZ1F780M)

CCD Unit

Note:

Please adjust with covering topside of the lens by hands in order not to let in outdoor daylight.

-102-

KX-F900

ADJUSTMENT:

[ LENS AND CCD READ POS-I'I-ION ADJUSTMENT

1) Loosen the lens fixing screw and CCD board fixing screw.

2) Adjust the position of the lens and CCD board so that the waveforrn appears as shown in the figure below.

3) Fix the lens fixing screw and CCD board fixing screw.

Oscilloscope setting

CH1 ........... 0.5 V/div

CH2 ........... 2 V/div

TIME .......... 1 ms

Trigger ....... CH2

Mode ......... AC

"Never connect land "AMON"

O_rvlD

O OAG

AMON

/CC>

CC>

,_) FIG

OSCILLOSCOPE J

To point 'FTG".J

To point "VID". j

CN7 CN6

Extension cord (Part No. PQZZ2K12Z) [ IExtension Cord

(DIGITAL BORAD)

I I (Part No. PQZZ8K18Z)

Illlllllll I

To CCD baord

?...

-I

/_ _ _ Lens fixing screws WAVEFORM

MAX

(for CCD Board)

CCD board fixing screws

-103-

--KX-F900 1

I WHITE LEVEL ADJUSTMENT J

1) Remove the CCD TOOL from CCD unit.

2) Attach the white paper on the CCD unit.

3) Attach the CCD TOOL on the CCD unit.

4) Adjust VR801 on the CCD board so that the waveform becomes 1.0__+0.2V.

Notes: 1. After the adjustment is finished, assemble the unit by reversing above procedure.

2. Please adjust with covering topside of the lens by hands in order not to let in outdoor daylight.

3. If you have no instrument to repair, trim off the chart on next page, then attach on the target glass.

(This is a temporary treatment. You should use an instrument for this adjustment purpose, if you require an

accurate repairment.)

Chart

CCD Tool

(PFZZ 1F780M)

White Paper

(ex. PPC Paper)

WAVEFORM

_2 I_I .O+0.2V

5. DOCUMENT READ START POSITION ADJUSTMENT

1) Connect AC cord.

2) Copy the document, and confirm the read start position of the document.

3) If get out of position, adjust the read position.

4) Press the MENU button.

5) Press the #, 9, 0, 0, 0, * and 5, 6, 3 buttons.

6) Press the Fl,l--I, SET and MENU buttons.

To move the image to the right direction

,o 1

15---- Standard (Default)

14 !o

To ve the image to the left direction

The starting position of reading shifts 1 mm as number of changes.

--104-

I KX-F900

(for white level adjustment) (for lens and CCD read position adjustment)

LED Array _-

Side

:: /'_: Z?

: :: , T: [ ]

!_i-Y] i]i !

:? :/(--- edge of the glass

L__ ,-_ -

:2; :_ : : 4

i: :=

[_L_ ......... _:___J [he edge ul glass

__1___-------_-_--- and chart should be

_ ___--_ _ut togeter, then fix

_t"'m i ,, ! ! 1 /! r___p_[ with tape

--I IIU

Tape pe

everse

Make sure the position of L and R.

t,..,

-I

--105-

I_ Kx..F900

106-

KX-F900

6. CORDLESS ADJUSTMENT

6-1. OBJECTIVE

This procedure will enable the technician to make adjustments to the KX-F900 PORTABLE HANDSET and CORDLESS

BASE UNIT.

_2. GENERALINFORMATION

This procedure has 2 sections. The first section instructs the technician on how to align the PORTABLE HANDSET. We

recommend aligning the PORTABLE HANDSET first, since you will need the PORTABLE HANDSET to align the

CORDLESS BASE UNIT. The second section aligns the CORDLESS BASE UNIT. You can use either section sepa-

rately, or together to align the entire cordless phone unit.

At the beginning of each section, you will find a preparation procedure instructing you on how to prepare the unit to the

point of placing the unit in TEST mode. Please follow this procedure to insure proper alignment.

Each section's procedure consists of Adjustment Items adjusting one specific variable hardware component.

Each Item lists the equipment needed, how to connect and setup the equipment, how to make the adjustment, and how

to verify the adjustment if necessary.

Before the actual procedure, you will find a procedure detailing how to place that part in TEST mode. You will have to

perform this procedure before each individual Adjustment Item.

Once aligned, please remove all equipment connections and solder points, and reassemble the unit. As a final check,

power up the phone and check for PORTABLE HANDSET linking with the CORDLESS BASE UNIT.

IPORTABLE HANDSET I

(1)PREPARATION

Please perform the following steps to prepare the PORTABLE HANDSET for alignment. Please refer to the

HANDSET REFERENCE DRAWING for connection and test point locations.

1. Remove battery cover and battery.

2. Remove both screws at the case bottom.

3. Grabbing hold of the back near the bottom, gently pry off the back of the case.

4. Remove the antenna mounting screw.

While heating the antenna solder connection, pull out the antenna. (Refer to page 125)

5. Remove the top P.C.Board mounting screw.

6. Unsolder both speaker connections on P.C.Board.

7. Remove the PORTABLE HANDSET P.C.Board.

8. Remove the keypad membrane.

9. Solder High Frequency Cable open end to ANT and RF GND points.

10. Using the Digital Multimeter, measure DC VOLTS output on the Telephone Analyzer.

Adjust the output voltage to 3.9V DC.

11. Solder battery connection wires at the points shown in the PORTABLE HANDSET REFERENCE DRAWING.

Solder the positive lead to IC204, towards the bottom of the P.C.Board. Solder the negative lead to the MIC

minus lead, closest to IC204. DO NOT APPLY POWER TO THE PORTABLE HANDSET AT THIS TIME!!!!!!

12. Solder a small, insulated piece of wire to GND as well.

13. Solder 1 isolation capacitor's positive lead to SP+ test point (TP4). When soldering, keep the lead close to

the P.C.Board as possible since you will lay the keypad membrane over part of this lead.

14. Solder a small, short, insulated wire to MIC test point (TP8).

15. Lay the keypad membrane over the keypad switch contacts.

€._

-I

.._

-107--

I Kx'F90o-I

(2) SYMPTOM/REMEDY TABLE

If you have oneof the listed symptoms, please refer to this table and make the appropriate adjustments.

SYMPTOM REMEDY

Does not link with CORDLESSBASE UNIT Check Items (A) and (B).

If both items are OK, adjust Items (D) and (E).

Speaker level is unstable Check Items (A) and (B).

If both items are OK, adjust Items (C).

Tx sound is unstable Check Items (A) and (B).

If both items are OK, adjust Items (F).

(3) ADJUSTMENT PREPARATION

Please perform the following procedure before starting the Adjustment Procedure. You only have to perform this procedure

only once to complete all Items, but you will have to perform this procedure to make an individual Adjustment Item.

1. You will need all equipment listed in the Item's EQUIPMENT section.

2. Setup all equipment as specified in the Item's PROCEDURE section SETUP portion.

3. On the PORTABLE HANDSET under test, press and hold down the 1,9, and -_ keys.

4. Apply power to the PORTABLE HANDSET.

5. Release the 3 keys. You should hear the PORTABLE HANDSET beep. If you do not hear a beep, remove the power

from the PORTABLE HANDSET and repeat the last 2 steps.

6. Press the INTERCOM key, then press the TALK key. PORTABLE HANDSET should now be in TEST MODE

(CH 1 TALK). The IN USE/BATT LOW LED should be on. If the PORTABLE HANDSET is not in TEST MODE,

remove the power and repeat the last 3 steps.

7. Remove the keypad membrane and lay it a side.

(4) ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

ADJUSTMENT ITEM

DESCRIPTION

(A)

Rx VCO Voltage

Confirmation only

(B)

Tx VCO Voltage

Confirmation only

(c)

SP Output

EQUIPMENT

Digital Multimeter

SETUP to measure DC Voltage, 20V

range

Digital Multimeter

SETUP to measure DC Voltage, 20V

range

Marconi

SETUP Put in Receiver Test Mode.

RF GEN

FREQ 902.1000MHz

LEVEL 60dBpV

SET MOD

FREQ 1.000kHz

LEVEL 5.000kHz

High Frequency Cable to left RF

Connector. Audio Cable positive lead to

isolation capacitor, negative lead to GND

BNC end to AF INPUT connector.

PROCEDURE

Connect negative lead to RF module metal cover

and positive lead to TP5. Measure voltage and

confirm that this voltage is between 0.8V DC and

1.8V DC. DO NOT PROCEED IF NOT IN RANGE!!

Connect negative lead to RF module metal cover

and positive lead to TP6. Measure voltage and

confirm that this voltage is between 0.8V DC and

1.8V DC. DO NOT PROCEED IF NOT IN RANGEfl

Adjust VR202 until AF VOLTS equals

-33dBV +l-ldBV

Note

This voltage reading is with no speaker or load

attached to the PORTABLE HANDSET P.C.Board.

-108-

KX-F900

ADJUSTMENT ITEM

DESCRIPTION

(O)

20dB Electric Detection

(E)

MIC Input

(F)

Standard Frequency

EQUIPMENT

Marconi

SETUP Put in Receiver Test Mode.

RF GEN

FREQ 902.1000MHz

LEVEL 60dBIIV

SET MOD

FREQ 1.000kHz

LEVEL 5.000kHz

One end of BNC cable to left RF con-

nector, other end to Attenuator Input.

Audio Cable positive lead to isolation

capacitor, negative lead to GND, BNC

end to AF INPUT connector.

Oscilloscope

SETUP Xl probe connected to INPUT

1. Probe ground connected to GND.

TIME/DIV 1ms

VOLT/DIV 1V

Auto trigger Attenuator

SETUP High Frequency Cable to

Attenuator Output.

Marconi

SETUP Put in Transmitter Test mode.

AF GEN

FREQ 1.000KHZ

LEVEL 41mV [23mV]

Connect High Frequency Cable to

right RF connector.

Connect Audio Cable positive lead to

MIC, negative lead to GND, BNC end

to AF GEN OUTPUT.

Marconi

SETUP Put in Transmitter Test mode.

AF GEN

FREQ f.000kHz

LEVEL 21mV

Connect High Frequency Cable to

right RF connector.

Connect Audio Cable positive lead to

MIC, negative lead to GND, BNC end

to AF GEN OUTPUT

PROCEDURE

On Marconi, press SINAD until the display shows

the SlNAD value and press dB. Then press RF GEN

and LEVEL. Attach the oscilloscope probe to 20dB

test point (TP7). Using the VARIABLE knob on the

Marconi, decrease RF GEN LEVEL until SlNAD v

alue is between 7dB and 9dB. NOTE: this value will

not be stable. Adjust VR401until oscilloscope voltage

toggles. This is the 20dB SET POINT.

NOTE: toggling may not occur at regular intervals.

Decrease RF GEN LEVEL until the SINAD value

decreases by at least 3dB. Check that oscilloscope

voltage is high. Now increase REF GEN LEVEL

until SlNAD value is at least 3dB above the 20dB

SET POINT. Check that oscilloscope voltage is low.

Adjust MR201 until Marconi MOD LEVEL

equals 5kHz +/-0.5kHz

Note

The 41mV value is for units of suffix A and

the 23mV value is for units of suffix B~.

Adjust VC401 until Marconi TX FREQ equals

926.100MHz +/-0.0005MHz

Note

This Item's setup is exactly the same as Item (E).

If you have done Item (E), simply look at TX FREQ

and make the adjustment.

,c,

Once aligned, please perform the following procedure.

1. Disconnect all equipment and solder connections. Use solder wick to clean up any solder you added.

2. Install the keypad membrane on top of the PORTABLE HANDSET keys.

3. Install the PORTABLE HANDSET P.C.Board.

4. Solder speaker wires back onto the P.C.Board observing correct polarity.

5. If you will align Item (E) RX Input in CORDLESS BASE UNIT, then solder a short wire across the MIC leads.

Remember to unsolder this wire after you completed the CORDLESS BASE UNIT alignment.

6. Insert antenna into the case.

7. Install antenna and top P.C.Board mounting screws and solder antenna connection.

8. Install case back and bottom mounting screws.

9. DO NOT INSTALL THE BATTERY AT THIS TIME!!!!H

-109-

LKX-F900

POR]ABLE HANDSET REFERENCE DRAWING

©_

_©

110-

CORDLESS BASE UNIT

[ Kx: ,oo='j

(1) PREPARATION

Please prepare the BASE UNIT before performing any adjustment procedures. Refer to the CORDLESS BASE UNIT

REFERENCE DRAWING for connection and test point locations.

1. Remove the 3 screws on the bottom cabinet of the handset cradle.

2. Remove the bottom cabinet of the handset cradle.

3. Remove the soldering on the antenna wires of the RF module.

4. Remove the base unit anchoring screw.

5. Use the telephone cord to connect the fax machine line and PHONE TEST #1 on the telephone analyzer.

6. Use the telephone cord to connect the corded telephone and PHONE TEST #2 on the telephone analyzer.

7. Solder the plus and minus sides of the RF coaxial cable to ANT and RF GND, as shown on the page 113.

8. Connect the BNC connector on the RF coaxial cable to ANT on the Marconi.

(2) SYMPTOM/REMEDY TABLE

If you have one of the listed symptoms, please refer to this table and make the appropriate adjustments.

SYMPTOM REMEDY

Does not link with PORTABLE HANDSET Check Items (A) and (B).

If both are OK, adjust Items (E) and (F).

Transmission sound to PORTABLE HANDSET receiver is unstable Check Items (A) and (B).

If both are OK, adjust Items (C) and (D).

(3) ADJUSTMENT PREPARATION

Please perform the following steps to prepare the CORDLESS BASE UNIT for the Adjustment procedure.

1. While pressing the 1 and 8TART/OOPY/SET KEYS, turn on the power to the fax machine.

[Cordless Test] appears on the machine's LCD display.

2. Press the MUTE KEY four times.

[4. Talk Mode] now appears on the machine's LCD display.

3. Press the START/COPYISET KEY.

[Channel=01] now appears on the machine's LCD display.

,I, Any channel can now be keyed in using the 10 numeric keys on the machine.

4. Press the START/COPY/SET KEY twice.

The talk mode is now established for the channel displayed in step 3.

#=l

IL1B40 I

i i__

now appears on the machine's LCD display.

Channel

Talk Mode

5. Establish the standard settings of the Marconi.

•First, set the RX test items.

GEN FREQ: 926.1 MHz

LEVEL: 60 dB!_V

MOD1 FREQ: 1 kHz off

LEVEL: 5kHz

MOD2 off

•Next, set the TX test items.

RF GEN ON

AF1 FREQ: 1 kHz off

LEVEL: -27dBm

AF2 off

TX FREQ: 902.1 MHz

-111-

I Kx-F 0 L

(4) ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

ADJUSTMENT ITEM

DESCRIPTION

(A)

Rx VCO Voltage

Confirmation only

(B)

Tx VCO Voltage

Confirmation only

EQUIPMEN]

Digital multimeter

Set to the DC voltage measurement in

the 20V range.

Digital multimeter

Set to the DC voltage measurement in

the 20V range.

PROCEDURE

Connect the minus wire to the metal cover of the

module and the plus wire to TP5, measure the volt-

age, and check that it comes within the 0.7 to 1.8

Vdc range. Proceed no further if the voltage is out-

side the designated range.

Connect the minus wire to the metal cover of the

module and the plus wire to TP6, measure the volt-

age, and check that it comes within the 0.8 to 1.8

(c)

Standard Frequency

Marconi

Press the TX test key.

Telephone Analyzer

Vdc range. Proceed no further if the voltage is out-

side the designated range.

Adjust VC301 is such a way that the TX FREQ offset

value comes within the + 500 Hz range.

(D)

TX Output

(E)

Standard Modulation

(F)

20 dB Electric Detection

Take the corded phone off the hook.

Marconi

Press the RX test key.

Set MOD1 to ON.

Connect LINE SCOPE on the telephone

analyzer and AF INPUT on the Marconi.

Telephone Analyzer

Take the corded phone off the hook.

Marconi

Press the RX test key.

Set MOD1 to OFF.

Press the TX test key.

Set AF1 to ON.

Connect LINE SCOPE on the telephone

analyzer and AFGEN OUT on the

Marconi.

Press the _key.

Telephone Analyzer

Place the corded phone on the hook.

Marconi

Press the TX test key.

Set AF1 to OFF.

Press the _key.

Press the RX test key.

Set MOD1 to ON.

Connect LINE SCOPE on the telephone

analyzer and AF INPUT on the Marconi.

Telephone Analyzer

Take the corded phone off the hook.

Adjust VR501 is such a way that the audio level is

set to -19 + 1 dBm.

Adjust VR502 is such a way that the FM level is set

to 6.4 + 0.5 kHz.

Adjust GEN LEVEL on the Marconi in such a way

that the SIAND is set to 20 + 1 dB.

Adjust VR301 in such a way that the letter "C"

flashes on the machine's LCD display.

Flashes

Once aligned, please reassemble the base unit. Also take off the back of the PORTABLE HANDSET and unsolder the

MIC lead short wire if you previously installed it.

-112-

CORDLESS BASE UNIT REFERENCE DRAWING

KX-F900 ]

*CONNECTION

ANT

Marconi

Corder Telephone

KX-F900 I

PHONE TEST JACKS#1 #2 LINE SCOPE

Telephone Analyzer

INPUT

•CORDLESS BASE UNIT P.C.BOARD

(Component View)

RF Unit _

TP5 O

TP6

• J

[]

VR502

Standard

Modulation

VR501

TX Output

"_"'- Cordless Base

mP.C.Board

GND

_ Coaxial Cable

( Soldering side)

VC301 VR301

Standard --- 20dB

Frequency Noise Squelch

--1 I

€..

-t

.-I

-113-

I " KX'FgOo-- I

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1. How to Remove the

Cordless

2. How to Remove the

3. How to Remove the

4. How to Remove the

5. How to Remove the

6. How to Remove the

7. How to Remove the

8. How to Remove the

9. How to Remove the

10. How to Remove the

11. How to Remove the

12. How to

13. Howto

14. Howto

15. Howto

16. How to

Page

Handset Cradle Cab,

Base Unit Board and RF Unit ....................... 115

Operation Block ........................................... 116

Operation Board and LCD ........................... 117

Bottom Frame .............................................. 118

Analog, Digital Boards, Speaker and Mic .... 118

Power Supply Board and AC Inlet ............... 119

Motor Block ................................................. 119

CCD Unit ..................................................... 120

Rollers ......................................................... 120

Cutter Block ................................................. 121

Recording Paper Cover ............................... 122

Remove the Thermal Head Roller ................................... 123

Remove the Document Tray ............................................ 124

Remove the Bottom Cabinet of Portable Handset ........... 125

Remove the Antenna and Portable Handset Board ......... 125

Replace Flat Package IC ................................................. 126

114-

Ref.No.1

Procedure

HOW TO REMOVE THE PORTABLE HANDSET CRADLE CAB, CORDLESS BASE

UNIT BOARD AND RF UNIT

1) Push the front lid open button to open the operation block.

2) Pull the libs of unit.

3) Remove the handset cradle cabinet.

4) Remove the 3 screws (A).

5) Remove the 2 connectors.

6) Pull the libs of the RF unit and pull up the RF unit.

CHARGE BOARD

RF UNIT

HANDSET CRADLECABINET

CONNECTOR

CORDLESS

BASE UNIT

BOARD

CONNECTOR

(A)€ @

(A)&

FRONT LiD OPEN BUTTON

r..D i

¢.Di

f"rl i

I_01

m i

Ill I

i.,-i i

f.D I

i-- I

€/} I

115-

iKX-F900 I

Ref. No. 1

Procedure

HOW TO REMOVE THE OPERATION BLOCK

Push the front lid open button in the direction of the arrow to open the operation block.

Pull both sides of the arms. (See Fig. A)

Pull up the operation block.

Fig. A

OPERATION BLOCK

FRONT LID OPEN BUTfON

• HOW TO ATTACH THE OPERATION BLOCK:

Operation Block

1) Set the both arms on the boss as showing in following

Fig. B.

2) Push the operation block down.

Boss

Fig. B

-116-

Ref. No. 3

Procedure

2--*3

HOW TO REMOVE THE OPERATION BOARD AND LCD

1) Remove the 6 screws (A) and the operation block cover.

2) Remove the 2 screws (B).

3) Pull out the 1 connector and remove the 1 flexible connector.

4) Remove the operation board.

5) Removethe LCD.

Pulldown the

nnector

_ fRl:x?b_eetcohnenector

CONNECTOR.__

LCD

(B)

(A)

OPERATION BOARD COVER

DN BOARD

FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR

Ill

--I

€_

KX-F900

-117-

LKX-F900 I

Ref. No. 4

Procedure

Ref. No. 5

Procedure

4_5

HOW TO REMOVE THE BOTTOM FRAME

Remove the 6 screws (A).

Remove the 2 screws (B).

Remove the bottom frame. _)

j_ (A)

HOW TO REMOVE THE ANALOG, DIGITAL BOARDS, SPEAKER AND MIC

BOTTOM FRAME

1) Remove the 3 screws (A).

2) Remove the analog board.

3) Remove the 2 connectors.

4) Remove the 7 connectors.

5) Remove the 1 screws (B).

6) Remove the digital board.

7) Remove the 1 screw (C).

8) Remove the speaker.

9) Remove the MIC.

(A)

'ii'

ANALOG BOARD

MIC ,__ CONNECTORS

118-

Ref. No. 6

Procedure

4,6

Ref. No. 7

Procedure

4--,10--,7 1) Remove the paper cutter. (See Ref. No. 10)

2) Remove the 2 screws (A).

3) Remove the motor block.

--KX:Fg00]

HOW TO REMOVE THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD AND AC INLET

1) Remove the 4 screws (A) and remove the power supply board.

2) Remove the 1 screw (B).

3) Remove the 2 connectors.

4) Remove the AC inlet.

(A)

¶r _ CONNECTOR

_,(B) (A,

POWER SUPPLY BOARD /.'_i_

HOW TO REMOVE THE MOTOR BLOCK

_OR BLOCK

-4

-119-

IKX-F900

Ref. No. 8

Procedure

4-*8

HOW TO REMOVE THE CCD UNIT

1) Remove the 2 screws (A).

2) Remove the CCD unit.

'_ (A)

' _ _--_- CCD

UNIT

HOW TO CLEAN:

Clean the glass of CCD

unit with cloth soaked in

alcohol.

Ref. No. 9 HOW TO REMOVE THE ROLLERS

Procedure

4--,5---7 1) Remove the motor block. (See Ref. No. 7)

--*8-*9 2) Remove the stopper with minus screwdriver.

3) Remove the rollers.

4) Remove the gear and stoppers from roller shaft and replace roller.

DOCUMENT FEED ROLLER_

STOPPER@ _

SEPARAION ROLLER

_jSTOPPER

,,,_DOCUMENT FEED ROLLER

_/,STOPPER

STOPPER

GEAR STOPPER

-120-

Ref. No. 10

Procedure

HOW TO REMOVE THE CUTTER BLOCK

1) Push the front lid open button in the direction of the arrow to open the operation block.

2) Remove the upper guide.

3) Remove the 2 screws (A).

4) Remove the shaft with minus screwdriver (small size) as showning in following Fig. A.

5) Remove the paper cutter block.

6) Remove the cutter guide.

7) Replace the paper cutter.

8) Remove the stopper with minus screwdriver (small size) as showing in following Fig. B.

9) Remove the recording paper roller.

PAPER GUIDE

FRONT LID

OPEN BUTTON

Remove the shaft

Fig. A

STOPPER

RECORDING

PAPER ROLLER

(A)

HOW TO CLEAN:

Clean the roller with cloth

soaked in alcohol.

JS DRIVER

Fig. B

Ill

-I

-121 -

r ....KX-F'O01

Ref. No. 11

Procedure

10-* 11

HOW TO REMOVE THE RECODING PAPER COVER

1) Pull out the both arms as showing in following Fig. A.

2) Remove the recoding paper cover.

RECORDING PAPER COVER

- 122-

Ref. No. 12

Procedure

10-'12

HOW TO REMOVE THE THERMAL HEAD ROLLER

1) Remove the thermal head block.

2) Pull out the 2 connectors.

3) Remove the 2 screws (A) of thermal head to remove the guides.

4) Replace the thermal head.

THERMAL HEAD BLOCK .

(A)_ ONNECT

GUIDEJ

THERMAL HEAD /

GUIDE j _" (A)

HOW TO CLEAN:

Clean the printing surface

of thermal head with cloth

soaked in alcohol.

I_I

Iorj I

I _'J I

I m I

ImI

i i

in,_ i

[ _m i

i i

I _') I

123-

LKX-F900 I

Ref. No. 13

Procedure

HOW TO REMOVE THE DOCUMENT TRAY

1) Push the installing section in the direction of the arrow to remove the document tray.

DOCUMENT TRAY

-124-

_- KX- -F9oo ..........1

Ref. No. 14

Procedure

Ref. No. 15

Procedure

14---15

HOW TO REMOVE THE BOTTOM CABINET OF PORTABLE HANDSET

1) Remove the battery cover in direction of arrow.

2) Remove the 2 screws (A) and remove the bottom cabinet.

i _.._) Battery Cover ,I_, f__A) (A)

HOW TO REMOVE THE ANTENNA AND PORTABLE HANDSET BOARD

Remove the 1 screws (A).

Heat the solder as showing in folloing Fig. A

Pull up the Anttena.

,t!j

Heat the solder

Fig. A

- -- Bottom Cabinet

6t}

€/)

ill

-4

"-I

- 125-

I KX-F900 1

• PREPARATION

• PROCEDURE

HOW TO REPLACE FLAT PACKAGE IC

-SOLDER

• Soldering iron

• Flux

Sparkle Solder 115A-1, 115B-1

Almit Solder KR-19, KR-19RMA

Recommended power consumption will be between 30 W to 40 W.

Temperature of Copper Rod 662 + 50°F (350 +10°C )

(An expert may handle 60~80 W iron, but beginner might

damage foil by overheating.)

HI115 Specific gravity 0.863

(Original flux will be replaced daily.)

1. Temporarily fix FLAT PACKAGE IC by soldering on two marked pins.

-Temporary soldering point.

*Check accurate setting of IC to the corresponding soldering foil.

2. Apply flux for all pins of FLAT PACKAGE IC.

_._ ..... Flux

3. Solder using specified solder, in direction of arrow, by sliding the soldering iron.

Soldering iron

Specified solder

• MODIFICATION PROCEDURE OF BRIDGE

1. Re-solder slightly on bridged portion.

2. Remove remaining solder along pins using soldering iron as shown in below figure.

bddge

-126-

IKX-F900 J

CIRCUIT OPERATIONS

Page

1. Connection Diagram ........................................................................ 128

2. General Block Diagram ........................................................... 129-130

3. Control Section ........................................................................ 131-136

3-1. Block Diagram ................................................................... 132

3-2. Reset Circuit ...................................................................... 133

3-3. SRAM and RTC Back up Circuit ....................................... 134

3-4. Supervision circuit for Thermal Head Temperature .......... 135

3-5. LED Array .......................................................................... 136

4. Facsimile Section ..................................................................... 137~145

4-1. Image Data Flow during Facsimile Operation ........... 137, 138

4-2. Thermal Head ............................................................ 139, 140

4-3. Read Section ..................................................................... 141

4-4. Stepping Motor Drive Section ........................................... 142

4-5. Sensor and Switches ................................................ 143~145

5. MODEM Section ...................................................................... 146~152

5-1. Function ..................................................................... 146-151

5-2. MODEM Circuit Operation ................................................ 152

6. Explanation of Analog Section Block Diagram ........................ 153, 154

7. NCU Section ............................................................................ 155, 156

8. ITS and Monitor Section .......................................................... 157, 158

9. TAM Interface Section ............................................................ 159-161

10. Operation Panel ............................................................................. 162

11. LCD COG Type .............................................................................. 163

12. Switching Power Supply Section ........................................... t 64-166

13. Cordless Section .................................................................... 167~183

13-1. Explanation of Data Communication ........................ 167-170

13-2.

13-3.

13-4.

13-5.

13-6.

13-7.

Frequency Table ................................................................ 170

Block diagram of Cordless Base Unit ....................... 171,172

Circuit Operation of Cordless Base Unit ................... 173, 174

Circuit Operation of RF Unit ...................................... 175-177

Block diagram of Portable Handset .......................... 178, 179

Circuit Operation of Portable Handset ...................... 180~183

€")

-I

rrl

-I

- 127-

1. CONNECTION DIAGRAM

I I wl-I

LED ARRAY +24v

[ sENs°R1 °uZ °s1-1

CCD

BOARD

+SVD

COM

NI5

COM

vSS

LCD I"-R'/_V--

(COG)I _

_-I1 11o

012 20

OI 3 30

014 40

o 15__ 5o

o,6 oo

ol 7

o 18_ 81o

O190m 910

oF0 IO10

CN7

CN8

CN6

O 3

CN10

O 3

CN9

CN5

o 2

o 3

O 4

o 5

O 6

o 7

O 8

o 9

O10

CN1

3 O

5 O

7 O

9 e

10 C

11 _.._..O

CN2____

3 C

4' C

8 C

9 0

10 C

11 O

ON3

CN11

CN15

1"6

190o

11 0

12 O

13 O

14 O

15 O

16 O

170

18 O

CN501

o----I1

OI2

OI3

OI4

OI5

OI6

OI7

OI8

OI9

OI10

o111

0112

0113

0114

0115

0116

0117

OI18

CN503

1 I

CN502

1 o

5 o

6 o

9 o

10 O

11 O

12 O

MLED

SLED

V.._...E__R

M_+

i CN651

O 3 BATTERY

o 4 CHARGE

o 5 BOARD

O 6

O 7

OI2

OI3

OI4

OI5

ol 6 UF UNIT

OI8

OI9

OI10

Oill

OI12

ON2Z1

6 CN152

10 CN24"

11 1F _

_N272 2

_1_ CN25"

,_ CN25"

11I

220

330

4 40

5 50

6 60

7 70

TO TEL LINE

Ex. TEL

SPEAKER

+5VA

+SVU 1 1

AG O3

DG 04

PG O 5

M24V 0 6

OUT O 7

THPC)WEF 8

POWER

SUPPLY

BOARD

O5 6

O 6 THERMAL

0 7

O8 HEAD

0 9

OI 11

OI12

o1_3

_114

o115

-128-

2. GENERAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

[-= KX--F 0- ]

The control section will be explained as shown in the block diagraln.

(,1) ASIC (JC1) .................... Composed mainly address decoder, modem control section, CPU and R-[C.

Control the general FAX operation.

Control the operation panel I/F.

Control the thermal head I/F and CCD I/F.

Executing image processing.

(2) RQM (IC2) .................... Contains all of the program instructions for unit operations.

(3) Static RAM (IC3) .......... This memory is used mainly for parameter working storage area.

(4) MODEM (ICl 1) ............ Executes modulation and demodulation for FAX.

(5) Read section ................ Composed of the LED array light source, CCD image sensor to read transmitting

documents.

(6) Thermal Head .............. Contains heating elements for dot matrix image printing.

(7) Motor driver (IC7, 108) .Drivers the transmission motor and the reception motor.

(8) Reset circuit (IC9) ........ Provides reset pulse to each of the major IC's.

(9) Analog board ................ Composed of ITS circuit and NCU circuit.

(10) Sensor section ............. Composed of cover open sensor, document sensor, recording paper sensor, cutter

position switch, read position sensor, and jam sensor.

(11) Switching power ........... Supplies +5V and +24V to the unit.

supply section

(12) Cordless section ........... Composed of Cordless base unit, portable handset and battery charge unit.

(900MHz Cordless)

-I

ill

-I

129

General BLock Diagram (FAX)

.--L

¢.o

6£

THERMAL

HEAD

SENSOR _1

CUT-POS I I

ANT-CURL LJ

OPERATION PANEL

SENSOR LCD

LED DOC READ-POSITION LCD

iiiiii I 'ICON_

IIIlll

IIIIII _ --_

KEY MATRIX

SIRIAL VF

DIGITAL PCB BACK UP VCCM M

1C8 BA_ _ _

AD_SST÷_ATALUI,

{ !1 CPU-ASIC

_ _-] [_-_---i T7D56

v--_lnF1'F2 _ [ MOTOR_/F

EL c::=

ICll M

;OB_I L'

]

FILTER

POWER SUPPLY

RECTIFIER SW. TRANS

SW. MOS

--1 i

CONVERTER !

ANALOG P.C.B

sw215

_Ect

SW271

i_vEo

SW2_

TX MOTOR RX MOTOR

ANTI CURL

+24V +SV

(Refer to page 171 )

'1'1 £££

tt .............

TONE1 TONE2

CORDLESS BASE P.C.B.

t UN'TJL

(Refer to page 172)

ANT

+24V

÷SV ÷5V

T 0101 RL1Ol

0 Q1 L105 pOS TEL LINE

IC202 MOOR) = EXT

vox

i234 CROSSPO_NT _-I_

241 SPEAKER

SP MUTE

3. CONTROL SECTION

1QASIC (IC1)

This custom IC is used for g_n_ral PAX operatior_

(1) CPU: The KX-F900 uses ai_U equivalent CHU operating at 12MHz.

(2) RTC:

(3) DECODER:

(4) ROM/RAM I/F:

(5) CCD I/F:

(6) IMAGE DATA RAM:

(7) THERMAL HEAD I/F:

(8) TX MOTOR I/F:

(9) RX MOTOR I/F:

(10) OPERATION PANEL I/F:

(11) I/O PORT:

Many of the peripheral functions are handled by custom designed LSI.

As a result, the CPU only needs to process the result.

Real time clock.

Decodes the address.

Controls the SELECT signal of ROM or RAM and bank switching.

Controls document reading.

Inside ASIC and 8KB which is used by image processing.

Transmits the recorded data to the thermal head.

Controls the transmission motor which feeds the document.

Controls the receiving motor which feeds the reading document.

Serial interface with Operation Panel.

I/O Port Interface (Exa. Sensor etc.)

ROM (IC2)

This 128 KB ROM (EPROM or MASKROM) has 32 KB of common area and bank area (BK4-BK15).

The capacity of each bank is 8 KB.

The addresses of the common area are from 0000H to 7FFFH, and addressed from 8000H to 9FFFH are for the bank

area.

@RAM (IC3)

This 32 KB RAM has 8 KB of common area and bank area (BK0, BK1 ).

The capacity of each bank is 12 KB.

The addresses of the common area are from D000H to EFFFH, and the addresses from A000H to CFFFH are for the

bank area.

-4

131

CCD

HEAD

ROM(IC2) L

A0-17D0_7F

RD'_

F1,F2,FR,FTG,VIDEO

STBI4,THLAT

THCLK,THDAT

5V/BATT

(IC9) l

RESET I

IqBACKOPI

_TT_

CCD_TL ASIC

(IC1)

HEAD-CTL

-- XWDERR "'

L_oJqDJ

32.768KHz 24MHz

SRAM(IC3)

Ao-17

Do--7!*/

----_ RD

--_ WR

[ MODEM(IC11

--_ RD

WR TXOUT

RXlN

qu_

24MHz

KSTART,KLATCH,KSCLK, KTXD,KRXD

TMO-3,TXE

RMO-3,RXE

(IC7)

TX MOTOR

DR VER

(tc8)

RX MOTO_

DR VER/

A0_

D0-4

RD_

WR •

THPON

TONE 1

T2/BELL --_

RESET

_7°OPE PANEL

_TO

T×M

TORXM

CCLK

csm

CSO

CBUSY1 _--

CBUSY2

TO ANALOG

KX-F900

3-2, RESET CIRCUIT

The output from pin 3 of the Reset IC (IC9) resets the gate array (IC1), the modem (IC11), the gate array on the operating

board (10301), the Port IC (10151) on the analog board through the IC1.

(1) During to momentary power interruption, a positive reset pulse of 175 msec or more is generated and the system is reset

completely.

This is done to prevent partial resetting and system runaway during power fluctuation.

Timing Chart

+5 __ ,,_.8,_4. 3 It

: :about 175 ms jj

4.2 _ 4.3

: about 17._s_j}

(2) When pin 3 of the IO9 becomes low level, it will prohibit the RAM (IO3) from changing data.

The RAM (IC3) go into the backup mode, when it is backed up by the lithium battery.

Circuit Diagram

+5V

064

c00

IC9

101

R78

IC1

WDERR lo__L

102

103

RESET (TO ANALOG BOARD,

OPERATION BOARD)

RESET (TO MODEM)

(3) The watch dog timer, built-in the gate array (IO1), is initialized about every 1.5 ms.

When the watch dog error occurs, pin 104 of the gate array (IC1) becomes low level.

The terminal of WDERR signal is connected to the reset line so, WDERR signal works as the reset signal.

(')

-I

"1o

--I

-133-

KX-F900

3-3. SRAM and RTC BACK UP CIRCUIT

(1)Function

This unit has a lithium battery (BATT), which works tor the RAM (IC3) and Real Time Clock IC (RTC,lntegrated into

ASIC:IC1 ). The user parameter of autodial numbers, the transmission ID, the system setup date and so on are stored

in the RAM (IC3).

The RTC continues functioning, even when the power switch is OFF, back up by the lithium battery.

(2)Circuit Operation

When the power switch is turned ON, thus supplying the power through the IC9 to the RAM (IC3) and RTC.

At this time, the voltage at pin 28 of the RAM and pin 43 of the RTC are +5 V. When the power switch is turned OFF,

the BATT supplies the power to the RAM and RTC through the J1, R76 and IC9. At the time, the voltage at pin 28 of

the RAM and pin 43 of the RTC are about +2.5 V. When the power switch is OFF and the voltage of +5 V goes down,

the Reset IC. (IC9) outputs the reset signals. Pin 28 of the RAM (IC3) and pin 43 of the RTC become low level, then

the RAM and RTC go into the back up mode, when the power consumption is less.

Circuit Diagram

+5V

C64 1 1

IC9

VOLTAGE J_l

DETECTION

VCC O

. _1

R76

BATT

5V/BATT 28

ICl 43

----q

RTC

--C41

,,. C421

_° _L ', H

x _Tq4 J

47 - i J_7

SRAM

IC403

vcc

C€

-134-

rKX-F900 ]

3-4. SUPERVISION CIRCUIT FOR THERMAL HEAD TEMPERATURE

(1) Function

Thermal head temperature is disposed to convert voltage to digital data by using A!D converter of IC1. The CPU decides

the strobe width of the thermal head according to this value. Therefore, this circuit can keep the thermal head at an even

temperature in order to stabilize the printing density and prevent the head from being overheated.

Circuit Diagram

TH-

HEAD

r ......

t C37

R47 _ __y¢l-__

R48 R49

_, 27

\ 26

\ 25

\ 22

\ 24

\ 23

C39

STB1

STB2

STB3

STB4

THDAT

THCLK

THLAT

ADSEL1

AIN2

IC1

Timing Chart

Effective signal

ref LEVEL CLAMP

IC1 internal bias

CLAMP t"_l

N i

:;Ol

t"_l

C:l

m ,

"Ol

I1"11

135-

].....KX:F,00]

3-5. LED ARRAY

The LED ARRAY will light during transmission and copying as a light source to recognize document characters, patterns, or graph-

ics on a document.

It is also possible to light the LED ARRAY in the test mode.

Circuit Diagram

III

LED ARRAY

.-.-(

+24V 0V (LED ON)

ABOUT 10V (LED OFF)

IC7 ICl

MAIN BOARD

5V (LED ON)

0V (LED OFF)

136

4. FACSIMILE SECTION

4-1. IMAGE DATA FLOW DURING FACSIMILE OPERATION

COPY (Fine, Super-Fine, Half Tone)

(1) Line information is read by CCD, by way of route 1(!), it is inputted to IC1.

(2) In ICl, data is adjusted to suitable level for A/D conversion at Analog Signal P_uc_ssing Section, and by way of

route (_) it is inputted to A/D conversion (8 bit). After finishing A/D conversion, data is inputted to Image Processing

Section by way of route _, and by way of routes @ and ®, it is stored in RAM as shading data.

(3) Draft's information that is read by CCD is inputted to IC1 by way of route (!), and after adjusting to suitable level

for A/D conversion by way of route (_), draft's information is converted to A/D (8 bit), and it is inputted to Image

Processing Section. The other side, the shading data which flows from RAM by way of routes ® and (_, it is

inputted to Image Processing Section, and after finishing of draft's information's image processing, white is

regarded as "0" and black is regarded as "1", and by way of routes @ and ®, they are stored in RAM.

(4) White/Black data stored as above description 3), by way of routes @ and ®, it is inputted to P/S converter. White/

Black data converted to serial data in P/S converter is inputted to Thermal Head by way of route (_ and it is printed

out on recording paper.

Note: Standard; Read 3.85 times/mm

Fine; Read 7.7 times/mm

Super-Fine; Read 15.4 times/mm

Transmission

(1) Same processing of COPY items 1) - 3).

(2) Data stored in RAM of IO1 is outputted from IC1 by way of routes @ and _, and it is stored in system bus, and by

way of route @, it is stored in communication buffer inside RAM (IC3).

(3) While fetching data stored in communication buffer synchronous with modem, CPU inputs data to modem along

route @, where it is converted to serial analog data and forwarded over telephone lines via NCU Section.

Reception

(1) Serial analog image data is received over telephone lines and input to the modem via NCU section, where it is

demodulated to parallel digital data. Then the CPU stores the data in the communication buffer of RAM (IC3) along

route 12.

(2) Data stored in RAM (IC3) is decoded by CPU by way of way of route @, and it is stored in RAM by routes (_ and

®.

(3) Same processing of COPY item 4).

-I

rrl

-I

137

[..... Kx-F900 ..... }

Block Diagram

IC1

IC3

RAM

IC2

ROM

SYS] EM

BUS

\\"

IMAGE

PROCESSING

SECTION

cPul

RAM

.,,__ /I

P/S

CONVERTER

ANALOG

SIGNAL PROCESSING

SECTION

,. THERMAL

O HEAD

MODEM

NCU

TEL.LINE

138

KX-F900

4-2. THERMAL HEAD

(1)Function

This unit utilizes state of the art thermal printer technology.

The recording paper (roll paper) is chemically processed. When the thermal head contacts this paper it emits heat momen

tarily, black dots (appearing almost as a point) are printed on the paper. If this point is continued, litters and/or diagrams

appear, and the original document is reproduced.

COMPOSITION OF THE RECEIVE RECORD SECTION (THERMAL RECORDING FORMAT)

Platen Roller

Thermal Recording Paper

Thermal Head

(2)Circuit Operation

There are 18 driver ICs aligned horizontally on the thermal head and each one of these ICs can drive 96 heat emitting

registers. This means that one line is at a density of 96 )< 18=1728 dots=(8 dots/mm).

White/Black (white=0, black=l) data in one line increments is synchronized at IC1 pin 24 (THCLK) and sent from IC1 pin

22 (THDAT) to the shift register of the fCs. The shift registers of the 18 tCs are connected in series, and upon shift of 1728

dot increment, all the shift register become filled with data, and a latch pulse is emitted to each IC from IC1 pin 23

(THLAT).

With this latch pulse, all the contents of shift registers are latched to the latch registers. Thereafter, through the addition of

strobe from the IC1 pins (25, 26, 27, 28) only dot of location of black (=1) among latched data activates driver, and current

passes to heat emitting body to cause heat emission.

Here the strobe of four lines STB1 to STB4 impresses at intervals of 9.216 msec, as required for one-line printout, for

each 1/4th of 18 IC unit (4 unit or 5 unit) upon each time interval divided into four equal increments.

The sequence is as shown below. [Moreover, in the case of strobe width, the resistance value of the thermistor inside the

thermal head is constantly detected by IC1 pin 38, and vales from the ROM (IC2) table corresponding to temperatures

eliminate temperature changes of density through setting by CPU.]

When the thermal head is not used, the IC1 (119, TH-POWER) becomes low level, IC7 becomes OFF, RL201 breaks, and

the +24 V power supply for the thermal head driver is not impressed to protect the IC.

t.-

.-I

--i

-139-

Circuit Diagram

MAINBOARD ',JWIICHING POWER SUPPLY L_JAHD

24V RL201 CN301 CN2

1HERMAL HEAD

"/L_o_ "16 E 1 .+24V

iI o=o_t_.;÷_vF-2:1: _ +_v I

111 , , , ,0oo..:. ,SOOT.......

I- ll---tNO'I--{Ii'------INO'2

c I I I I I

GATE ARRAYI ] [" I _ {_}--'--_ II_ {_----_

(IC,) R55 2 8 XI XlJI ,..I I

.5° :.o.:,_ i.II '' ' ' ''

:.c_,_ = T.OL,3='"' I' _-- ' r_ ;"

STB1 R_I l -

I s:,,=t_; ,_ _

TR52 I

I Ic,o _,_ ,.,.STO°

Il°'°t"_° U .,

I_NO_._8

Timing Chart

(3.0MsecX1728)

4 5.184reset

CN6 PRINT DATA NEXT LINE PRINT DATA

@THDAT I

,_- 3.01._sec

@T.C_JqJ]J]_l_....... -I1_[1 I1Jl__J1Jl [lj1 FLIq FIFL

320 pcs 1728 pcs

@ THLAT

STB1

STB2

STB3

STB4

1728 pcs _,- 3.0psec

.0p.sec

3.0psec _ ______j._..p.

about 1.8 msec (at 26°C)

- [--_ TEMPERATURE OF THERMALHEAD

__J

LIJ

L_J

9.216 msec(COPY)

- 140-

KX-F900

4-3. READ SECTION

(1) Function

eA document is illuminated by the LED array, and the reflections pass through the reduction-projection lens and are im-

aged on the CCD image sensor.

eThe document image is photoelectrically transferred by the CCD image sensor, and an analog image signal correspond-

ing to one line of the document is continuously output.

•The anatog image signal enters the image signal processing circuit in ASIC (ICl) and then is coverted into a digital data.

(2) Circuit Operation

[Start]

When the START/COPY/SET button is pressed, ICl pin 62 goes to a high level and IC7 is turned ON, which makes CN7

pin 2 go to a low level and the voltage applied to the LED array to turn on the LED.

F1, F2, FR and FTG signals are output to the CCD board to drive the CCD image sensor. Therefore, when the LED is

turned ON, the VIDEO (analog image signal) is output from the CCD board to CN5 pin 7.

CCD Scanner Timing Chart (1 Dot Cycle)

VIDEO

m I

__1

]

>>1 I<< ND data valif

LED

ARRAY

1 DOCUMENT

II CN7 *24VI

CCD

BOARD

1I-I

",,,,LI

IC7

Block Diagram

CN6

c 1

6,8

+5V

R70

R71

R72

R7a

-I V,D O

t R75

R74

iC1

F153

F252

FR51

FTG50

AIN1

.-I

--I

-141 -

IKX-F900 1

4-4. STEPPING MOTOR DRIVE CIRCUIT

(1) Function

Two individual stepping motors are used for transmission and reception. They feed document or recording paper

synchronized for reading or printing.

(2| Circuit Operation

During motor drive, gate array IC1 pin 77/pin71 becomes high level, Q2/Q4 are turned ON, and QI/Q3 go ON as a result,

+24 V issuppliedto the motorcoil.

Steppingpulsesare outputform gate arrayIC1, causingdriverIC7/IC8 to goON. The motorcoil isenergizedsequentiallyin

2 phaseincrements,whichcausesa 1-step rotation.Rotationof 1-step 0.13mm of recordingpaperor documentpaper.

Timingchartisbelow.

TM0(RM0)

TMI(RM1)

TM2(RM2)

TM3(RM3)

Timing Chart

Function

Copy

FAX

Stepping Motor Phase Pattern

Mode

STD

Fine/Half Tone

Super Fine

STD

Fine/Half Tone

Super Fine

Paper Feed

Drive Phase

Pattern

1-2

Speed

434 pps

217 pps

434 pps

217 pps

1-2. Phase (Asic TM0-TM3, RM0-RM3 output)

GATE ARRAY

(let)

TXE

(RXE) '

TM0

(RMO)

TM1

(RM1)

TM2

(RM2)

TM3

(RM3)

Circuit Diagram

(71) (_

()

IC7(IC8)

73 4

(67) (4)

74 5

(68) (5)

75 6

(69) (6)

7(_ 7

(70) (7)

ittt

+5V

R43 +24v ,,_

(R_5)' 1

(Q3)

(R46)

( )

CN9

'(Igl o-

11 2

(11) o-

10 1

)(10)

Phase 0 - -

Phase 1

Phase 2

Phase 3

(02)

max. _/434 (sec)

(ON 10)

_ RECEPTION)

TRANSMISSION

MOTOR

m m m

m mm

m m m

mm m

When the motor is OFF, gate array IC1 pin 77/pin 71 becomes low level and Q2/Q4 are turn OFF. This causes Q1/Q3 to

also go OFF and inserted of +24V, +5V is supplied through DI/D2 so that the motor is held in place.

- 142-

KX-F900 I

4-5. SENSORS AND SWITCHES

[Recording Paper Sensor (SW273)]

_N_en recording paper is present, the plate push the switch lever, the input signal of IC151-6 pin (ANALOG) becomes low

level. When the set runs out of recording paper, the plate leaves the switch lever, the input signal of IC151-6 pin (ANALOG)

becomes high level.

I,, ,,I

o/o_,

SW273 R276 ,_C273

IC151

Analog Board

Signal (IC151-6 Pin)

Set Recording Paper Low level

No recording Paper High level

[JAM Sensor (SW272)]

When recording paper is jammed, the plate push the switch lever, the input signal of IC151-7 pin (ANALOG) becomes low

level. Usually, the plate leaves the switch lever the input signal of IC151-7 pin (ANALOG) becomes high level.

I,, ,,I t

___Jo _,

,_ SW272

R273

R274 i C272

IC151

Analog Board

Signal (IC151-7 Pin)

JAM Low level

NO JAM High level

c__.i

'--I_

m¸

-I

- 143-

KX-F900

[Cover Open Sensor (SW271)]

When the upper cabinet is closed, the plate push the switch lever, the input signal of IC151-33pin (ANALOG)

becomes low level. When there is opened, the plate leaves the switch lever, the input signal of IC151-33pin (ANALOG)

becomes high level.

o/o

Analog Board

Signal (IC151-33 Pin)

Close Low level

Open High level

IC151

[Read Position Sensor (PI301)]

When an document is brought to read position, the shelter plate pass the sensor light, the phototransistor becomes ON,

and the input signal of IC301-15pin (Operation) becomes low level. When there is no document at the read position, the

shelter plate shuts the sensor light, the phototransistor becomes OFF, and the input signal of IC301-15pin (Operation)

becomes high level. (When checking this sensor condition, IC301-16 pin becomes low level).

+5V

SHELTER PLATE

+5V

, i

i i

R331

IC301

15 XLD12

-- LED11

Operation Board

Phototransistor Signal (IC301-15 Pin)

Out of the Read Position OFF High level

At the Read Position ON Low level

- 144-

KX-F900 1

[Document Sensor (PI302)]

When a document is set, the shelter plate shuts the sensor ligh, the phototransist or becomes OFF, and the input signal

of IC301-15 pin (Operation) becomes high level. When there is no document, the shelter plate passes the sensor light, the

pt_ototTa_s'ts_.orbecomes ON, and the input signal of IC301-15 pin (Operation) becomes low level.

(When checking this sensor condition, IC301-9 pin becomes low level.)

SHELTER PLATE

+5V

................. =

R332

IC301

XLD12

_LED10

Analog, Digital and Operation Board

Phototransistor

No document ON

Set document OFF

Signal (IC301-15 Pin)

Low level

High level

_.9

"-4

"1o

::o

-I

-145-

KX-F900

5. MODEM SECTION

5-1, FUNCTION

The unit uses a 1 chip modem (IC11 ), enabling it to act as an interface between the control section for FAX sending and

receiving, and the telephone line. During a sending operation, the digital image signals are modulated and sent to the

telephone line, while during a receiving operation, the analog image signals which are received via the telephone line are

demodulated and converted into digital image signals. The communication format and procedures for FAX communication

are standardized by ITU-T. This 1 chip modem (IC11) has hardware which sends and detects all of the necessary signals

for FAX communication and DTMF.

It can be controlled by writing commands from the ASIC (IC1) to the register in the modem (IC11).

This modem (IC11) also sends DTMF signals, generates a call tone (from the speaker), and detects a busy tone and dial

tones and DTMF.

Overview of Facsimile Communication Procedures (ITU-T Recommendation):

(1) ON ITU-T (International Telecommunications' Union.)

The No. XIV Group of ITU-T, one of the four permanent organizations of the International Telecommunications Union

(ITU), investigates and make recommendations on international standards for facsimile.

(2) Definition of Each Group

•Group I (G1)

A-4 size documents official without using formats which reduce the band width of signal sent over telephone lines.

Determined in 1968.

Transmission for about 6 minutes at scanning line density of 3.85 lines/ram.

•Group II (G2)

Using reduction technology in the modulation/demodulation format, A-4 size document is sent at an official scanning

line density of 3.85 tines/mm for about 3 minutes.

Methods to suppress redundancy are not used.

Determined in 1976.

•Group III (G3)

Method of suppressing redundancy in the image signal prior to modulation is used. A-4 size document is sent within

about one minute.

Determined in 1980.

•Group IV (G4)

Transmission is via data network. Method is provided for suppressing redundancy in signals priorto transmission,

and error-free reception of transmission is possible.

The scope of these facsimile applications is not limited simply to transmission of written statements. Through

symbiotic linkages with other communications methods, itcan be expected to expand to include integrated services.

(3) Facsimile Call Time Series

As shown in the following diagram, the facsimile call time series is divided into five phases.

Message Transmission

F- _',

PhaseA I. PhaseB I PhaseC I PhaseD

_ Facsimile Procedure

Facsimile Call

Progress derection of operation

I Phase E I

"1 [

Phase A: Call setting

Call setting can be manual/automatic.

Phase B: Pre-message procedure

Phase B is a pre-processing procedure and a sequence for confirming status of terminal, transmission route, etc. and

for ter-minal control. It implements terminal preparation status, determines and displays terminal constants, confirms

synchronization status, etc. and prepares for transmission of facsimile messages.

Phase C: Message transmission

Phase C is the procedure for transmission of facsimile messages.

Phase D• Post message procedure

Phase D is the procedure for confirming that the message is completed and received. In the case of continuous

transmission, return is made repeatedly to phase B or phase C for transmission.

Phase E • Call retrieval

Phase E is the procedure for call retrieval, that is, for circuit disconnection.

- 146-

I KX-F900

(4) Concerning Transmission of Time

[TransmissionT,mel=IContro,T,moI+ I +

Transmission time consists of the following.

Control time :This is time at the start of transmission when functions at the sending and receiving sides are

confirmed, transmission mode is established, and transmission and reception are

synchronized.

Image transmission time:

This is the time required for transmission of document contents (image data). In general, this

time is recorded in the catalog, etc.

Hold time: This is the time required after the document contents have been sent to confirm that the

document was in fact sent, and to check for telephone reservations and/or the existence of

continuous transmission.

(5) Facsimile Standard

Item _

Connection Control Mode

Terminal Control Mode

Facsimile Signal Format

Modulation Mode

Transmission Speed

Redundancy Compression

Process 2 dimension : MR Mode (K=2.4)

(Coding Mode)

Main Scan : 8 pel/mm

Resolution Sub Scan : 3.85, 7.71/mm

Line Synchronization Signal EOL Signal

1 Line Transmission Time Depends on degree of data reduction.

[ms/line] Minimum Value : 10, 20

Can be recognized in 40ms.

Telephone Network Facimile

G3 Machine

Telephone Network Signal Mode

T. 30 Binary

Digital

PSK (V. 27 ter) or QAM (V. 29)

300 bps (control Signal)

2400, 4800, 7200, 9600 bps (FAX Signal)

1 dimension : MH Mode

-I

147

I.....KX:FgO0.........I

(6) Explanation of Technology

(j) G3 Communication Signals (T. 30 Binary Process)

In G3 Facsimile communication, this is the procedure for exchange of control signals between the sending and receiving

machines both before and after transception of image signals.

Control signals at 300 bps FSK are: 1850 Hz...0, 1650Hz...1.

An example of binary process in G3 communication is shown below.

Transmitter Side Receiver Side

Ph_LseA

Phase B

Document set

Dial

FAX SW

Checks the performance of the

sendingmachine (document width,

transmission speed, etc.), and sets

the communication mode.

Transmission Start

Phase C

Phase D

Phase E

Transmission End

Information of Disconnect

Disconnect

Explanation of Signals

(CNG) ._

CED

DIS

----_____ DCS

Training 1, TCF

CFR

Training 2

Image Information

EOP

MCF

.---.__._____ DCN

Bell Detection

Notifies of capacity of

receiving unit (e.g., recording

paper width, transmission speed).

Check the receive preparation

and line condition.

Receive preparation OK

Record Start

Record Stop

Reception OK

Disconnect

Control signals are comprised mainly of 8-bit identification signals and the data signals added to them. Data signals

are added to DIS and DCS signals.

Signal .....DIS (Digital Identification Signal)

Identification Signal Format .....00000001

Function:

Notifies of capacity of receiving unit

The added data signals are as follows.

(Example)

Bit No. DIS/DTC DCS

1Transmitter - T. 2 operation

2 Receiver - T. 2 operation Receiver - T. 2 operation

3 T.2 IOC = 176 T. 2 IOC = 176

4 Transmitter - T. 3 operation

5 Receiver - T. 3 operation Receiver - T. 3 operation

6 Reserved for future T. 3 operation features

- 148-

KX-F900

Bit No.

11,12

(0, O)

(0, 1)

(1, O)

(1,1)

17, 18

(0, O)

(o,1)

(1, O)

(I, 1)

19, 20

(0, 0)

(0, 1)

(1,0)

(1, 1)

DIS/DTC DCS

Reserved for future T.3 operation features

Transmitter - T.4 operation

Receiver - T.4 operation

Data signalling rate

V.27 ter fallback mode

V.27 ter

V.29

V.27 ter and V.29

Reserved for new modulation system

Vertical resolution = 7.7 line/mm

Two-dimensional coding capability

Recording width capabilities

1728 picture elements along scan line

length of 215 mm 4- 1%

1728 picture elements along scan line

length of 215 mm __+1% and

2048 picture elements along scan line

length of 255 mm _ 1% and

2432 picture elements along scan line

length of 303 mm 4- 1%

1728 picture elements along scan line

length of 215 mm _ 1% and

2048 picture elements along scan line

length of 255 mm -I- 1%

Invalid (see Note 7)

Maximum recording length capability

A4 (297 ram)

Unlimited

A4 (297 mm) and B4 (364 mm)

Invalid

Receiver - T.4 operation

Data signalling rate

2400 bit/s V.27 ter

4800 bit/s V.27 ter

9600 bit/s V.29

7200 bit/s V.29

Vertical resolution = 7.7 line/mm

Two-dimensional coding

Recording width

1728 picture elements along scan line

length of 215 mm _ 1%

2432 picture elements along scan line

length of 303 mm 4- 1% and

2048 picture elements along scan line

length of 255 mm _ 1% and

Invalid

Maximum recording length

A4 (297 mm)

Unlimited

B4 (364 mm)

Invalid

Signal .....DCS (Digital Command Signal)

Identification Signal Format .....X1000001

(Example)

Function:

Notifies of capacity of receiving machine obtained

at DIS and announces the transmission mode of

the sender. The added data signals are as follows.

Bit No.

21,22, 23

(0, 0, 0)

(o,o,I)

(0, 1,0)

(1,0, 0)

(0,1,1)

(1, 1,0)

(1,0, 1)

(1,1,1)

DIS/DTC

Minimum scan line time capability at the receiver

20 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=T3.85

40 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=T3.85

10 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=T3.85

5 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=T3.85

10 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=1/2 T3.85

20 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=1/2 T3.85

40 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=1/2 T3.85

0 ms at 3.851/mm: T7.7=T3.85

Standard setting DCS

Minimum scan line time

20 ms

40 ms

10ms

5ms

0ms

L"_.I

('_1

m I

D, [

-149-

KX-F900

Bit No.

DIS/DTC

Extend field

2400 bitJs handshaking

Uncompressed mode

Error correction mode

28 Set to "0"

Standard setting.......... Dcs ..........

29 Error limiting mode 0

30 Reserved for G4 capability on PSTN 0

31 Unassigned 0

32 Extend field 1

Validity of bits 17,18

Bits 17,18 are valid

Bits 17,18 are invalid

(0)

(1)

Extend field

2400 bitJs handshaking

Uncompressed mode

Error correction mode

Frame size 0 = 256 octets

1 = 64 octets

Error limiting mode

Reserved for G4 capability on PSTN

34 Recording width capability 1216 picture elements 0

along scan line length of 151 mm __.1%

35 Recording width capability 864 picture elements 0

along scan line length of 107 mm 4- 1%

36 Recording width capability 1728 picture elements 0

along scan line Jength of 151 mm 4- 1%

37 Recording width capability 1728 picture elements 0 Invalid

along scan line length of 107 mm 4- 1%

38 Reserved for future recording width capability 0

39 Reserved for future recording width capability 0

40 Extend field 1 Extend field

41 Semi super time /mm 1

42 Semi super time /inch 0

43 Super time 0

44 inch 0

45 mm 1

46 MSC/SF 0

47 Select polling 0

48 EXT 0

Note 1 - Standard facsimile units conforming to T.2 must have the following capability : Index of cooperation (IOC)=264.

Note 2 - Standard facsimile units conforming to T.3 must have the following capability : Index of cooperation (IOC)=264.

Note 1 - Standard facsimile units conforming to T.4 must have the following capability : Paper length=297 mm.

Signal IdentificationSignalFormat Function

Training 1

Extend field

Recording width

Recording width indicated by bits 17,18

Recording width indicated by this field bit

information

Middle 1216 elements of 1728 picture

elements

Middle 864 elements of 1728 picture

elements

Invalid

TCF

(Training Check)

CFR

(Confirmation to Receive)

Training 2

X0100001

Fixed pattern is transmitted to receiving side at speed

(2400 to 9600 bps) designated by DCS, and the receiving side

optimizes the automatic equalizer, etc., according to this signal.

Sends 0 continuously for 1.5 seconds at the same speed as the

training signal.

Notifies sending side that TCF has been properly received. If

TCF is not properly received, FTT (Failure To Train) X0100010

is relayed to sender. Sender then reduces transmission speed

by one stage and initiates training once again.

Used for reconfirmation of receiving side the same as training 1

-- 150-

;----K_X-F9oo........

Signal

Image Signal

RTC

(Return to Control)

EOP

(End of Procedure)

MCF

(Message Confirmation)

DCN

(Disconnect)

MPS

(Multi-Page Signal)

Identification Signal Format Function

Refer to next page.

X1110100

X0110001

X1011111

X1110010

Sends 12 bit (0...01 X 6 times to receiver at same

speed as image signal and notifies of completion of

transmission of first sheet.

End of one communication

End of I page reception

Phase Estarts.

Completion of transmission of I page. If there are still

more documents to be sent, they are output instead of

EOP. After MCF reception, sender transmits image

signal of second sheet.

PRI-EOP Xl 111100 If there is an operator call from the sender, it is output

(Procedural Interrupt-EOP) after RTC.

PIP X0110101 Output in the case of operator call from receiver.

(Procedural Interrupt Positive)

Modified Huffman (MH) Code

(_) Redundancy Compression Process Coding Mode

This set uses one-dimensional MH format.

(a) Document IBasic Technique of Facsimile

Facsimile

(b) Part of document --:// /_=::

Black 4 2 4 2 8 3

image signals i // /.___

equivalent to (b)

(d) Codification of 00110111101010 011 110101 11 001000

MH formula

11 0100111 000101 000011 10

(Black 2) (White 18) (Black 8) (White 13) (Black 3)

(d) Total bit number after MH codification (63 bit)

Code for Code for

Run length White Line Black Line

0 00110101 000011011

1 000111 010

2 0111 11

3 1000 10

4 1011 011

51100 0011

6 1110 0010

71111 00011

810011 o001o1

910100 000100

10 00111 0000100

11 010(30 0000101

12 001000 0000111

13 000011 00000100

14 110100 00000111

15 110101 000011000

16 101010 0000010111

17 101011 0000011000

18 0100111 0000001000

011 101010

(Black 4) (White 16)

c::

-I

-151 -

KX-F900 I

5-2.MODEM CIRCUIT OPERATION

The modem (IC11) has all the hardware satisfying the IIU-I standards mentioned previously.

When the gate array IO1 (116) is brought to low level, the modem (IO11) is chip-selected and resistors inside IC are selected

by select signals from ASlO (IO1) A0-A4, commands are written through data bus, and all processing is controlled at the ASlC

(ICl) according to ITU-T procedures. Here the signal IN"-Tdispatched from _ (pin 52 of I011) to the ASlC (IO1) when

preparation for acceptance of transmission data is OK and when demodulation of reception data is complete, the ASIC (IO1)

implements post processing. This modem (IO11) has an automatic application equalizer. With training signal 1 or 2 at time of

G3 reception, it can automatically establish the optimum equalizer. Also, the modem (IO11) generates an internal clock of

24.00014MHz by means of an external crystal oscillator (Xl).

(1) Facsimile TransmissionlDTMF Line Send

The digital image data on the data bus is modulated in the modem (ICl 1), and sent from pin 44 via amplifier

IO10 (6 -,- 7), the NCU section to the telephone line.

C73- r R90 --* 1010(6-7) _ CNI(10) _ 0N271(10) _ C184 _ R182 -* IC151(73-63)

IC11 (44) -[_ C74-'

[C203 -" R210 ---*IC201(2-1) --* C202 -" R201 _ T101] -* TEL LINE. [ ]: NCU section

(2) Facsimile Reception

The analog image deta Which is received from the telephone line passes through the NCU section and enters pin 45 of the

modem (IC11 ). The signals that enter pin 45 of the modem (IC11 ) are demodulated inthe board to digital image signals,

then placed on the data bus.

In this case, the image signals from the telephone line are transmitted serially, Hence they are placed on the bus in 8 bit

units. Here, internal the equalizer circuit reduces the image signals to the long-distance receiving level.

It is designed to correct the characteristics of the frequency band centered about 3 kHz and maintain aconstant receiving

sensitivity. It can be set in the service mode.

TEL.Line --* T101 -4 R202 --, C205 --* 10201(6-7) --* C210 --* C212 --* R215 --* C213 _ IO202(1-2) --* O217

CN271(9) --* Rll -* IC10(2-1) _ C19 ---*R13 -* IC11(45)

(3) DTMF Transmission (Monitor tone)

The DTMF signal generated in the modem (IC11) is output from pin 44, then passes through the analog G/A IO151, and

the NCU section to the telephone line as same as facsimile transmission signals.

(DTMF Monitor Tone)

IC11 (44) _ 073 _R90 -+ ICl 0(6-7) --, ON1 (10) _ 0N271 (10) --* C184 --* R184 --, I0151 (76-41) --* O158 --,R161 --,

074 -J

IC151 (40-38) --* R245 ---,0245 --, 10241 (4-5,8) _Speaker

(4) Call Tone Transmission

The call signal which is generated in the ASIC (IC1) passes through analog G/A IC151 and IC241 (4 --, 8, 5) to the speaker.

I01(85,87) -_ R59 -* 056_* 0N2(1) --* 0N272(1) -+ R186 --* O187 _ IO151(78-41) --* C158 _ R161 ---*

R60 ---*C57 -J

IC151 (40-38) --, R245 --* C245 ---,IC241 (4-5,8) _ Speaker

(5) Busy/Dial Tone Detection

The path is the same as for FAX receiving. When it is detected, the carrier detect bit of the resistor in the modem

(IC11) becomes 1, and this status is monitored by the ASIC (IC1).

152

KX-F900

6. EXPLANATION OF ANALOG SECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM

(1)Function

The analog section serves as interface with the telephone line. The digital board (ICt 1) for transmission reception of FAX

signals, and the speech network IC (ICl 09) are connected to the NCU section. Switching between the digital board (IC11) and

the other sections is executed by means of a multiplexer in the NCU section. The control signals to the individual analog sections

are output mainly from the ASIC ICl, and the status information for the various sections also is held in the ASIC ICl.

Simple explanations for the various sections are given below.

2) Circuit Operation

[NCU Section]

Interfacewith the telephone line and external telephone.This is composed of bell detection circuit,pulse dial generation cir-

cuit, EXT.TAMOFF-HOOK detect circuit,voxcircuit,amplifiercircuitforlinetransmissionand reception,sidetonecircuitmul-

tiplexercircuit,etc. See belowfor details.

[Modem (ICll)]

Thisis usedfor FAX signaltone modulation, DTMF signaltransmission,ring tonegeneration, and line transmission beep

generation.The DTMF signaland Beepare placedontothe TX system.The ringtone passesthroughthe analogswitch.

Outputtothe speakervia the poweramplifier(IC241).

[Speech Network IC (IC109)]

Thisis special IC combiningthe hands-free and handsetcircuits in 1 chip. The handset and microphoneare connected to

thiscircuit.At the timeofhands-freeoperation,the SP outputisoutputtedafterpassagethroughthe poweramplifier(IC241)

andthe DTMF monitortoneandthe pulsedial monitortoneoutputfrom IC11 (DigitalBoard)and IC151 (AnalogBoard)are

givenas inputto thisIC and becomethe monitortone atthe time of handsetdialing.

,--!

"_1

3:,

--I

-153-

Analog Unit Block Diagram

Rx 0 "

TX 0

CN152 _ 30

MIC__ I--_ IC109

SP-Phone IC

O O O O

L L L L

1 2 3 4

CN251

+5VA "_

+5VD '_

+24V -"

THPON --

DG --

(PG)

from P,S.U

+5VD

+24V !

24-DOW

TONE1 TONE2

IC151

G/A

CROSS POINT

SPEAKER AMP CN241

IC241 SPEAKEo_SP MUTE R

CTL DATA ADDRESS

7 NCU Section

I KX-F900

7-1. GENERAL

This section is the interface with the telephone line and external telephone. It is composed of EXT. TEL Line relay

(RL101), bell detection circuit, pulse dial circuit, Auto Disconnect circuit, TAM Interface circuit, line amplifier and

sidetone circuits and multiplexer.

7-2. EXT. TEL. line relay (RL101)

(1) Circuit Operation

Normally this relay switches to the external telephone side (break) and itswitches to the open side (make) when the set

starts facsimile communication.

IC151 (32) High Level --* Q271 ON --* RL101 (make)

7-3. BELL DETECTION CIRCUIT

(1) Circuit Operation

Signal waveform of each section are indicated below. Signal (low level section) input to pin 4 of gate array IC151 are

read out at CPU and judged as bell.

Between Tip and Ring

.t48 V f__--_about 150V

Between PC101 (1) and (2)

PC101 (4)/Gate Array IO151 (4)

TEL LINE --, PC101 (1,2-4) -* IC151 (4)

7-4. PULSE DIAL CIRCUIT

(1) Circuit Operation

In OFF-HOOK Condition, the photocoupler PC102 pin (2) is low level by IC151 pin (3) and PC102 pin (4) is low level so

Q101 is ON. At the time of pulse dial operation, PC102 pin (2) becomes high level by IC151 pin (3), so that PC4 pin (4)

becomes high level, and Q101 becomes OFF line ON/OFF by high/low control for IC151 pin (3) makes pulse dial opera-

tion possible.

IC151 (3) High Level --, PC102 (2) High level ---*PC102 (4) High Level --, Q101 OFF --, Telephone Line

-I

"13

Ill

--I

155-

7-5. AUTO DISCONNECT CIRCUIT

(1)Function:

This circuit is used to detect the fact that another telephone connected to the same line is OFF-Hook while the unit is in the

time of TEL/FAX's arrival bell ringing operation.

(2)Circuit Operation:

Tip (Ring)---*D101 ---,Q101 -* C107 -* D102 -* Rl14 -* Q102 --* PC103.

Duringthisinterval C107 chargesand the base of Q102 becomeshigh,and PC103 pin(2)becomeslow,causingPC103 to

go ON. If a parallel-connectedtelephoneorexternaltelephoneis putintoan OFF-HOOK status,,chargeceasesto flow

Cl 07 andthe base ofQ102 becomeslow,causingPC103 to go OFF.

When a line isconnected,Q102 and PC103 goON, causingpin5 of IC151 to go low.When the line isdisconnected,Q102

and PC103 go off,causingpin 5 of IC151to gohigh.

7-6. TAM INTERFACE CIRCUIT

This circuit is for to switch between FAX receiving and external TAM's message recording automatically.

This circuit consists of EXT. TAM OFF-HOOK detect circuit, Monitor Transformer, Multiplexer, Amplifier, VOX detect circuit.

In details please refer to page 142. TAM INTERFACE SECTION.

7-7. LINE AMPLIFIER AND SIDE TONE CIRCUITS

(1)Circuit Operation

The receptionsignal received as outputfrom the line transformerT101 is given as inputto R202, C205 to IC201 pin (6), ant

it is inputtedtothe receptionsystemat an amplifiergain10.1 dB from pin7.

The transmissionsignalgivenas input to IC201 pin (2) via R210, C203 is amplifiedto about15 dB, It is outputtedform pin 1

of IC201anditistransmitttedto T101 via R201, C202,T101.Withoutsidetonecircuit,thetransmissionsignalherewouldreturr

completelyto thereceptionamplifiervia R201, C202. Here,the signaloutputfrom IC201pin (1) passesthroughC218, R203

R204, C207 andentersthe amplifierIC201 pin (5), andthisis usedto cancelthe returnpartof the transmissionsignal.

This is the sidetonecircuit.

Transmission Signal: C203 --* R210 --* IC201 (2-1) _ C202 --, R201 .L, T101 ---*TEL LINE

C218

R203

R204

C207

Reception Signal: TEL LINE--, T101 _ R202---, IC201(5,6-7) _ C210

(Side Tone)

156-

8. ITS (Integrated telephone System) and MONITOR SECTION

IKX-F900

8-1. GENERAL

The general ITS operation is executed by the special iC109. This IC has a speakerphone circuit and a handset circuit in 1

chip, and control to each mode is executed from the outside (IC151). At the time of speakerphone operation the speaker output

passes through the power amplifier (IC241). The DTMF signal and the bell tone are output from the modem (IC11 : digital

board). The alarm tone, the key tone, and the beep are outputted from the gate array IC151 (digital board). At the time of pulse

dial operation, the monitor tone is outputted from the gate array IC151.

8-2. SPEAKER PHONE CIRCUIT

(1)Function

This circuit controls the automatic switching of the transmitted and received signals, to and from the telephone line,

when the unit is used in the hands-free mode.

(2)Circuit Operation

The speakerphone can only provide a one-way communication path.

In other words, itcan either transmit an outgoing signal or receive an incoming signal at a given time, but cannot do both

simultaneously. Therefore, a switchingcircuit is necessary to control the flow of the outgoing and incoming signals.

This switching circuit is contained in IC109 and consists of voice detector, TX attenuator, RX attenuator, compara tor and

attenuator control. The circuit analyzes whether the TX (transmit) or the RX (receiver) signal is louder, and then it

processes the signals such that the louder signal is given precedence. The voice detector provides a DC input to the

attenuator control corresponding to the TX signal. The comparator receives a TX and RX signals and supplies a DC input

to the attenuator control corresponding to the RX signal. The attenuator control provides a control signal to the TX and

the RX attenuator to switch the appropriate signals ON and OFF. The attenuator control also detects the level of the

volume control to automatically adjust for changing ambient conditions.

(Transmission Signal Path)

The input signal from the microphone is sent through the circuit via the following path:

MIC --* J270 --* C138 --* IC109 (13-27) --, R145 ---*IC151 (75-63) _ C203 _ R210 ---*IC201 (2-1) --, C202 -* R201 --*

T101 --* TEL LINE

(Reception Signal Path)

Signals received from the telephone line are outputted at the speaker via the following path.

TEL LINE --, T101 --* R202 --, C205 ---*IC201(6-7) --, C210 --* C173 --, R172 --, R173 --* C174 --, IC151(59-71) --* C142

-* R143 _ IC109 (22-30) --* C145 --, IC109 (4-7) --* R146 ---*C146 -,. IC151 (40-38) ---,R245 ---*C245 _ IC241 (4-5,8)

--* SPEAKER

(Control Signal Path)

Control signals for transmission and reception are inputted to IC109 via following path.

(Transmission Control Signal Path)

MIC --* J270 --, C138 _ IC109 [(13) --* MC AMP --* SW4 --* (31)] --* C130 --* R130 --* IC109 [(1) _ AMP --, Comparator]

(Reception Control Signal Path)

TEL LINE --* NCU Section [IC201(6-7)] -* C173 --* R172 --, R173 ---*C174 --* IC151(59-71) --* C142 -* R143

IC109[(22) -," SW3 ---, RX ATT -* (30)] --* C145 --* IC109 [(4) -* SW5 -_ SP AMP -," (7)] -.. C132 --* R131 ---*IC109 [(3)

--* AMP --* Comparator]

(Voice Detector)

The transmission signal given as input from the microphone to IC109 pin (1) passes through the built-in amplifier and en-

ters the voice detection circuit for judgment of voice noise. In case of noise, the TX attenuator is made effective via the at-

tenuator control.

(Attenuator Control)

The attenuator control detects the setting of the volume control through pin 11 of IC109 to automatically adjust for changing

ambient conditions.

-I

i'll

.-.I

- 157-

KX-F900 1

8-3. MONITOR CIRCUIT

(1) DTMF Monitor

(Speaker Operation)

ICll (44)--_ C73-_ R90 -* IC10(6-7) --, CNI(IO) --* CN271(10) -* C184 --, R184 -* IC151(76-41) -_ C158 --, R161

C74 J.

-* IC151 (40-38) --* R245 -* C245 --* IC241 (4-5,8) -* Speaker

(Handset Operation)

IC1 1 (44).,--_ c74C73._ R90 --* IC10(6-7) --, CN1 (10) --* CN271 (10) ---*C184 --* R184 --, ICl 51(76-41) -__ L1L153j54-[*

--, Speaker

(2) AlarmlBeep/Key tone

IC1 (86) -* CN1 (11 ) --, CN271 (11 ) --, R185 --, O186 ---, IC151 (77-41) --* O158 _ R161 --* IC151 (40-38) --* R245 --* C245

IC241 (4-5,8) --* Speaker

(3) Bell Signal

IC1(85,87)-_ R59 --* C56-_ CN2(1) --* CN272(1) --_ R186 --* C187 --, IC151(78-41) --, C158 -* R161 --*

R60 -* C57 -u

IC151 (40-38) --* R245 --* C245 -4 IC241 (4-5,8) --* Speaker

158-

KX-F900

9. TAM INTERFACE SECTION

9-1. FUNCTION

In case that EXT. TAM position is selected in Receive nlude, th_ ul _itreu_iv_ documents loJ kAX call or the external TAM

records a voice message automatically.

To switch between answering machine and facsimile in EXT. TAM Mode.

OPERATION EXPLANATION

When bell signal rings as many as the numbers

which installed in the connected answering machine,

the answering machine seizes the line,

then answering massage is out to the line.

10 seconds after the answering machine gets

the telephone call, no-sound detection begins.

The length of response messages

should be 8-16 seconds.

While response massage is being played,

the unit starts to detect CNG signal.

When CNG signal is received,

the unit switches to FAX receiving.

When there is approximately 5 seconds' no sound

situation for 20 seconds after being passed

10 seconds, the unit switches to FAX receiving.

During this period it detects CNG signal also.

When it cannot detect no-sound nor CNG,

it doesn't switch to FAX receiving,

the unit doesn't catch the line.

(The answering system hangs up the line.)

Bell Signals

Arrival

I, CNG Detect Section

} ..... ! 0.seconds ,,i /'No sound_detection (Max. 20 seconds) f l

,, /(_:(uu m me service moae) ._ Ant ]

No souna J \ ........ .

Answering Machine responds / ITAM holds the line

aboutl2 sec. (8-16 seconds: OGM out)

TAM is IDetect CNG on 5 sec silent I

Off-Hook ISwitch to FAX mode 1

(disconnect TAM)

Attention 1:

Attention 2:

No sound detection lasts 20 seconds after the telephone call comming in to the answering machine. If there

is no sound situation for more than 5 seconds (#701 in the service mode) it is switched to the facsimile.

When answering machine can't catch the telephone call because of the disconnection or no capacity in the

tape, the unit catches the call after 5 times' bell ring (#702 in the service mode), then switches to facsimile.

When you install in Service, it is possible for the unit not to catch phone calls.

.-I

"1o

rrl

.-I

-159-

9-2, CIRCUIT OPERATION

TAM INTERFACE circuit consists of EXT. [AM HOOK detection circuit, CNG signal from the party's detection circuit, VOX

detection circuit (to judge sound/no-sound) and RL101 (to separate EXT. TAM).

(1) EXT. TAM HOOK detection circuit

The bell comes to EXT. TAM and EXT. TAM seizes the line, causing to make DC LOOP. PC105 detects this voltage. During

detection PC105 (4) becomes low.

(DC LOOP)

Tip ---*POS101 --* L105 --* RL101 (7 -_ 6)3_---* VAR1------]--* L104 --* Tip1 --, (EXT.TAM) _ Ring 1 --* L103 -* R103 --*

L-, R192 -* PC105 J

L105 -*Ring

(2) CNG signal detection circuit

CNG signal from the party's FAX is detected in MODEM IC11 (digital board).

(Signal path)

TEL LINE -* O104 --* T102 --* O176 --* R176 -* IC151 (61)(67) --, R217 --* C214 -* IC202 (10)(11) --, C217 ---*CN271 (9) -*

CN1 (9) --, R97 --, IC10 (2) (1) --* C82 --* R95 --* ICll (45)

(3) VOX

VOX circuit detects if there is a signal or voice in the line. That's why VOX circuit reacts to OGM of EXT.TAM and ICM from

the party.

(Signal path)

TEL LINE -* C104 _ T102 _ C176 --, R176 -* IC151 (61-70) -* C291 ---,D290 --, R296 --* IC101 (6)(7) --, R290

/--* IC151 (30)

EXT.TEL Line --* VAR1

(4) RL101

Normally this relay switches to the external telephone side (break) and it switches to the open side (make) when the set

changes to facsimile communication from EXT.TAM operation.

IC151 (32) High Level --* Q271 --* ON ---, RL101 (make)

IC151 (32) Low Level --* Q271 --* OFF --, RL101 (break)

(5) Remote receiving

This is the DTMF signal of parallel connection TEL or EXT.TEL between T and R. When the party is FAX, this turns unit to

FAX receiving.

(Signal Path)

To defect DTMF signal in MODEM.

- 160-

Circuit Diagram

MODEM

0C11)

From

MODEM

(IC11)

IC202

_ 2 1 From line

MODRX

"f'X C184 R182

II-----'_-,

+5V

R291

R221 _4 5 ,

_R294

R290

A,J

''V

R296 D290 C291 7n

o_._ _ R295 _D291

VOX

10151

G/A

r =ldO .I.II101:110

To line

LOOP "_- ~

_,_--I I-

I 010'

,_1-.

C102

+5V

R102

,,,,,,

RL10_7 J_._ TO TEL LINE

POS101 JJ1

)SA 102

L106

•=- TO EXT TEL

R120 R104 R103 L103 _r_2

I _ _VAHR1 LI041_ I

_PC1011"_ : " J_ [ Pl I ;_.O.JT1

/ a:_'__L ..J__..r--'m +5v

0104::.106{_#_f (0_) It

_T-MONIT • . . 3_]5 T102 _

o,,,_,4=1=._I

o 5 _ o

jjTTI o

,xr

"1"11

- KX-F900

10. OPERATION PANEL

The unit consists of LCD (Liquid crystal display), KEYs and LEDs (light-emitting diode). They are controlled by the Gate Ar-

ray (IC301) and AS IC (IC1 : On the DIGITAL BOARD). (Fig.-a)

ASIC

ICl

DIGITAL BOARD

CN51 CN301

I' GATE ARRAY

IC301

DOCUMENT SENSOR

READ POS T ON SENSOR

(COG TYPE) I

t 2X2

KEYS

MATRIX

t 8X4

KEYS

MATRIX

LED

OPERATION BOARD

Fig-a DIAGRAM

Key Matrix

o"-.<

KS L0

KSL1

KSL2

KSL3

KIN 0

VOLUME

(S301)

ONE-TOUCH

($303)

ONE-TOUCH

($304)

KIN 1

STOP

(S305)

ONE-TOUCH

($307)

ONE-TOUCH

(S308)

KIN 2

START

/COPY/SET

($309)

LOWER

($311 )

ONE-TOUCH

(S312)

KIN 3

VOLUME

($313)

($314)

(S315)

(S316)

KIN 4

SP-PHONE

(S317)

MUTE

($318)

REDIAL/

PAUSE

(S319)

FLASH

(S320)

KIN 5

HELP

($321)

($322)

($323)

($324)

KIN 6

DIRECTORY

($325)

($326)

($327)

($328)

XLD 14

LED11

LOCATOR

INTERCOM

($335)

LED8

MEMU

($333)

RESOLUTION

($334)

KIN 7

AUTO

RECEIVE

($329)

($330)

($331)

-X--

($332)

- 162-

11. LCD COG TYPE

KX-F900 I

The Gate Array (IC301) needs only write ASCii code from the data bus (D4~D7). V0 is power supplies for crystal drive.

R320, R322 are density control resistors.

Consequently, in this set the timing (mainly positive clock) is generated by the LCD interface circuitry of the gate array

(I0301).

Circuit Diagram

LCD UNIT

(COG TYPE)

ENABLE

RESET

C316

R322

IC301

4LED7

Timing Chart

R/W

DB4NDB7

DATA

/--

Density Normal Dark

LED 7

(IC301-4 pin) H L m

t,-

-I

"I0

163

KX-F900

12. SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY SECTION

AC Input _ A

0--_ Input HRectifier--l";-, 1

A-B Voltage Wave Form

C-D Voltage Wave Form

__ SUB Printed

Circuit Board

IC101

E-F, r

G_HVOtage Wave Form

01-3F-3 r--

Block Diagram

Converter

Control

Circuit

(MC101)

Over

Current

Circuit

utput Circuit

DC-DC

Converter

Circuit

IError Detecting I--

Circuit /

_o24V Output

OGND

+5V Output

[Input Circuit]

Input current goes into input rectifier circuit through filter circuit. Fitter circuit decreases noise terminal voltage and

noise electric field strength.

[Rectifier Circuit]

Input current is rectified by D101 and charge C106 to make DC voltage, then supply power to converter

circuit. Voltage is supplied to control IC's kick-on voltage through R102 and R103. Inrush current is limited by

thermistor TH 101.

[Converter circuit]

The converter circuit of this power supply circuit is called fly back converter.

We explain the operation of this circuit with the simple circuit.

T101

p-<

_CONTROL CIRCUIT

D201

- 164-

P...PRIMARY WINDING

S...SECONDARY WINDING

B...CONTROL WINDING

IKX-F900

The circuit in the previous page, when the transistor Q101 is ON, secondary rectifier diode D201 is OFF and the energy is

charged in the transformer T101. Q101 continues being ON while the voltage is generated by control winding (B). Q101 is

tuned OFF by control circuit, then each windings of T101 changes the polarity and rectifier diode D201 truns ON.

The charged energy of T101 supplies power through D201 to output load. And the voltage of control winding is decreased

and QlOlcontines being OFF state. When all energy is discharged through D201, Q101 is turned ON again and it makes the

polarity of each windings of T101 in reverse and goes to self oscillation. When input voltage Ei is high, the ON period of Q101

becomes shorter, and when load current is high, the ON period of Q101 becomes longer.

The value of output voltage is

Eo = d/(1-d)*Ei

d = Ton/Ts

SW D (D201) Eo

_o ' 1_ on

Ei (Q101)

I VL

T101

,= T = =

J =

i i

', ,

i All

To,: ON TIME OF Q101

T, : PERIOD OF OSCILLATION

In the equivalent circuit:

When SW is ON, current flows

SW --* L

When SW is OFF, Current flows

L-* D--" RL

The value of inductance rectifiers increasing

current during ON period.

IL = Ei/L*d*Ts (1)

The value of inductance rectifiers decreasing

current during OFF period.

IL = Eo/L(1-d) * Ts (2)

From equations (1) and (2),

Eo = d/(I-d) * Ei

In the actual circuit, the fixed output voltage can be obtained by changing the winding ration of transformer T101. In this

converter circuit, the duty ratio of ON period and OFF period of the transistor produces output. In this power supply, the bias

winding is also built-in in the transformer and the output value is one. 24V output voltage is stabilized and changes the duty

ratio.

[Control Circuit And Error Detecting Circuit]

The control circuit amplifies the output withincreasedvoltage detected inthe error detecting circuit, then drives the main

transistor.Inthispowersupply the dutyratiois definedby changingthe ON periodof maintransistor.

This isshownasfollows.

When the outputvoltageof24V circuitbecomes higher, the currentof photocouplerPC101 increases,the pulse widthof

outputcontrolIC becomesnarrowandthe ON period ofQ101 becomesshorter.

[Over Current Limiter (O.C.L.)]

IC101 rectifiers the highest voltage with resistors R105 and R106 detecting the current in the primary side. When the current

is supplied higher than the highest voltage, it switches to ratch mode which stops oscillating.

[DC-DC converter]

Output 5V, is made by DC-DC Converter. 5V output is rectified by IC202, Q201, 1_201,D203.

-I

-i

-165-

KX-F900 I

Dummy load method (for the quick check of power supply output)

Power Supply Board

CN301

CN302

GND

24V

(_) :Vollage Meter

Output range

)5V (5.IV:L5%)

24V (24.5V+4%)

( _ 24V (24.5V+4%)

(4.7K_ 1/2W)

166

KX-F900 J

13. CORDLESS SECTION

13-1. EXPLANATION OF CPU DATA COMMUNICATION

(1) Calling

Portable

Handset (STANDBY MOD E)

Base

Unit

[TALK]

TALK LED ON

ACK-T

ACK-OK

(Empty Channel Information)

TALK

When calling, a communication

request DATA (ACK-T) is

transmitted from the Portable

Handset first, and a permitting

data (ACK-OK) is returned from

the Base Unit to it, then a

communication data (TALK) is

transmitted from the Portable

Handset.

OFF HOOK

IN USE LED ON

The permitting DATA (ACK-OK)

from Base Unit to Portable

Handset includes the empty

channel information stored in

Base Unit. After transmitting the

communication DATA (TALK)

from Portable Handset to Base

Unit, the channel is used.

(2) To terminate

Communication

[TALK]

TALK LED OFF STANDBY

When the TALK button on

Portable Handset is pressed

during communication, a LINK

terminating DATA (STANDBY) is

sent to terminate communication.

OFF HOOK

IN USE LED OFF

--I

'1:1

-4

-167-

(3) Ringing

Ringing

TALK LED Flashing

Portable

Handset

(STANDBY MODE)

Base

Unit

Ring

Ring J

Ring signal

IN USE LED Flashing

After detecting the Ring signal from circuit, Base Unit sends a ring signal DATA (Ring), then the Portable

Handset starts ringing.

(4) Ports for transmitting and receiving of data

Portable Handset :transmitting ... 54 Pin receiving ... 50 Pin

Base Unit' transmitting ... 48 Pin receiving ... 58 Pin

(5) Waveform of DATA used for cordless transmission and reception

The DATA which is transmitted from the Portable Handset to the Base Unit is combination of DATA 0, DATA 1,

DATA Delimt, Pre data and End data.

The DATA which is transmitted from the Base Unit to the Portable Handset is combination of DATA 0, DATA 1,

DATA Delimt, Pre data and End data.

-168-

KX-F900

PORTABLE HANDSET I

Transmitting DATA Format Pre data

DATA 0

DATAI

DATA Delimt

3.696 ms

4.704 ms

--q_I-L_J-qJ-U

<>< >

10.08 ms 4.704 ms

X2 X2

29.568 ms

END data

<>8.4 ms

IBASEUNITI

Transmitting DATA Format

DATA 0

1.344 ms

DATA1 FU

2.352 ms

DATA Delimt FU

3.360 ms

Pre data

/qJqJqJ-LRJ

/ vvvv

f_ _ / _*, /_

5.040 ms 3.36 3.36 3.36 3.36

ms ms ms ms

END data

J v _

3.36 ms 2.352 ms

18.48 ms

5.712 ms

(6) When linking

JI(--- 1 Frame

Predata I DATA0orDATA11 D I DATA0orDATAll D I

35 bit or 31 bit /

DATA Delimt

DATA 0 or DATA I .........

When LINKing from the Portable Handset (when becoming STBY to TALK), DATA is transmitted in above format. The

combined portion of DATA 0 and DATA 1 is transmitted in LINK requesting DATA (35bit) format first. Then, when LINK

OK (ACK-OK) DATA (19bit) is returned from the Base Unit, it is sent as LINK from DATA after changing the combination

of DATA 0 and DATA 1. And the DATA Delimt is between each Frame as a stop.

The contents of LINK requesting DATA and LINK form DATA are different depending on each operation.

-I

"Io

---I

-169-

KX-F900

(7) Pulse Dial

_-- Pulse DATA

Predata IDATA0orDATA1 j D I DATA0orDATA1

13 bit /

t_____>DATA Delimt

END data 1

When executing Pulse Dial,the Pulse Dial DATA is transmitted from the Portable Handset to the Base Unit in above format.

The combination of DATA 0 and DATA 1 are changed by each Dial No. And the DATA Delimt is between each Frame as

a stop. The number of Frame is 2.

(8) Tone Dial

Pre data

Tone DATA --_

lO T OorOAt lJ0IO TA0orO T l

13 bit / DATA Delimt

Continue DI.........

......... I Toneend I DIToneend

_---_--> 7bit DATA

IEND data I

When executing Tone Dial, Tone Dial DATA is transmitted from the Portable Handset to the Base Unit in above format.

The DATA is changed by Dial No. as same as Pulse Dial. When Tone Dialing, DATA (Continue DATA) that the key is pressed

continuously is sent to the Base Unit during the key is pressed. When depressing the key, the TONE Dial exterminating

DATA (Tone end DATA) is send, and the END data is sent finally.

NOTE

1,000,000 kinds of the security code are available for the

model KX-F900. Each time the portable handset is set on

the cradle of the base unit (for charging), the CPU

automatically change the security code.

13-2. FREQUENCY TABLE (MHz)

CH Base Unit TX

Portable Handset RX

1 902.100 MHz

2 902.150 MHz

3 902.200 MHz

4 902.250 MHz

5 902.300 MHz

6 902.350 MHz

7 902.400 MHz

8 902.450 MHz

9 902.500 MHz

10 902.550 MHz

11 902.600 MHz

12 902.650 MHz

13 902.700 MHz

14 902.750 MHz

15 902.800 MHz

Base Unit RX

Portable Handset TX

926.100 MHz

926.150 MHz

926.200 MHz

926.250 MHz

926.300 MHz

926.350 MHz

926.400 MHz

926.450 MHz

Base Unit TX

Portable Handset RX

926.500 MHz

926.550 MHz

926.600 MHz

926.650 MHz

926.700 MHz

926.750 MHz

926.800 MHz

902.850 MHz

902.900 MHz

902.950 MHz

903.000 MHz

903.050 MHz

903.100 MHz

903.150 MHz

903.200 MHz

903.250 MHz

903.300 MHz

903.350 MHz

903.400 MHz

903.450 MHz

903.500 MHz

903.550 MHz

Base Unit RX

Portable Handset

926.850 MHz

926.900 MHz

926.950 MHz

927.000 MHz

927.050 MHz

927.100 MHz

927.150 MHz

927.200 MHz

927.250 MHz

927.300 MHz

927.350 MHz

927.400 MHz

927.450 MHz

927.500 MHz

927.550 MHz

- 170-

I.-

1.1.1

-.I

r.,

I./.

,,:(

E3 r7

r_ cc

o o

- o.

cO n

._c

_ v

;CIRCUIT OPERATION j

39_VHO 8nS

39_VHO NIV_

Z)O

_°_ (°_H

_°_N_®H _ '_-7

o,_n__ ,r'lII I I I

(IINA 4U)

LO_IA ........

_OSNO

F--

TX FREQ 902.100 ~ 903.550MHz

RX FREQ 926.100 - 927.550MHz

BPF

LPF F302 Q304,303

AMP

1ST IF FREQ 10.7MHz 2ND IF FREQ 450KHz

IC301

l BPF BPF r

F303 II F304

I10.7MHz Q305 I I450KHz I

I I

+ TMXE

I I

,.. I

rRX VCO FREQ = 1ST LOCAL FREQ

l936.800 - 938.250MHz

IC302

2NDIF h IDISCRIMI

AMP _ NATER

GND

I Ai OUT

I _0

TX VCO FREQ

451.050 - 451.775MHz

FREQ 902.100 N 903.550MHz

Q301 Q302

AMP

q /

', / t -- _._--

L.................. IL-'IDETECTOR

__ D301,302

IlVlULTIPRIEFL. PLL LIIREFERENCEI_J BUFFER I

1_ x2 J'l! I" IOSC I_ AMP I I

- L- I _ ,

....... [-- :_ T _" Ti- _ X3.0_5:M :Z '

I_ T '\-r-. LI LOOP

I .... I"_ ] F LTER 10302

°3,01 ]

_×v0o,o_o5'0_2'°3°',°_3_ .xB_w_-] _

rxvco,c3o2,_o_ _ _

NOISE !_AMP

AGC

FLS

-o

UNLOCK O

l CLOCK O

_ATA 0

RST O

RXBSW O

+B_.5v O

TXB SW O

MOD O

13-4. CIRCUIT OPERATION OF CORDLESS BASE UNIT

IKX-F900

(1) Power Circuit (charging circuit power supply)

Pins 1 and 8 are switcl4ed in the clock period which is determined by capacitor C559 connected to pin 3 of the

switching regulator IC (IC504). The switching output turns Q509 ON or OFF and reduces the 24V voltage to 12V.

Pin 5 of IC504 is the feedback input pin whose input signal is used to stabilize the output voltage.

Circuit Diagram

VT(12V) +24v

_J502 0 ANALOG

CN501

(1,2)

L519

Q509

nr" IIIC504

÷ co

- O

(2) Charge Circuit

When the portable handset is places on the charging stand, Q505 is turned ON, and the charging information is

supplied to MPU pin 37 as a logical high signal. When the charging information is supplied to the MPU, the MPU

sends the ID signal from pin 44. This ID signal switches Q506, and it is supplied to the portable handset via the

charging pin of Q506. In the same way, when the spare battery is inserted into the charging stand, Q508, is

turned ON, and the charging information is supplied to MPU pin 36. When both the portable handset and spare

battery are to be charged, the MPU outputs a logical low signal from pin 27 which turns Q507 OFF and also turns

Q510 OFF, thereby limiting the charging current to the spare battery. When only the spare battery is to be

charged, the MPU outputs a logical high signal from pin 27 which turns Q507 and Q510 ON so that the charging

current is increased.

Circuit Diagram

CN503

R535

R539

C511 R540

Ics, l 7"

TT( _-'_Q506

C513 -'

l _ _________4 R543

.,_R551

R546 R545

At# 'W_

'.fT

R534 D503vt I

Q505

D504 R541

R542

Q508 _07

D506 R549

D505 w

,., I

1' R599

R548

"_R550

MPU

(IC501)

-I

"-4

-173-

I .....KX-F900

(3) Line Receiving Signal

The signal supplied from the line is input from pin 6 of CN501 through the analog board, and ti is output from

pin 10 of the RF unit via IC502 pins 21,20, 19, 17, 16, 13, 11 and 10 in this order.

R553 R622

L507 C571_'-_ C572

(6pin) VR503 _'R554 C518

Circuit Diagram

MPU

TX MUTE

_ 0 ' To

I IC502 Compander

(4) RX Data Circuit/Hard Mute Circuit

The AF signal output from the RF unit is filtered and amplified by a filter amplifier with a 500 Hz cutoff

connected to pins 1 through 4 of IC503. The resulting demodulated data waveform is then input to RX

DATA pin 6 of the MPU.

If there is data from the portable handset during talk operation, the portable handset data is as shown below

to prevent the data from leaking onto the line. Hardware muting is applied as the leading edge of the data

as soon as the data arrives. After this, muting is applied by the MPU.

Timing Chart

_J_Bed --I

eiected at peak level

HARD MUTE__[ I

RX MUTE

Circuit Diagram

C550 C552

RFAUpIT _R616 C551_--_ R618

C5421 _ i --:'1 _ I _ MPU l-

CCN502(3pin,iR60_9 __ RXDATA /

I .61o sc o3 o o31

IC547 Ix,._ D507 t:1607 t_

] R608R611_'I_I'--lC574 R612 Q504 +('_'_ _ +

C541 _':

MPU D508

RX MUTE

(5) ID Code Setting

When the portable handset is placed on the cordless base unit, the charge detector operates and ID data is

output from pin 44 of the MPU. After passing through data amplifier Q506 and the charge terminal, the data

is sent to the portable handset.

-174-

I KX-F900 I

13-5. CIRCUIT OPERATION OF RF UNIT

(1) PLL Circuit

The PLL IC comprises two PLL blocks, one for transmission and one for reception, a transmission multiplier

circuit, and a reception first mixer circuit.

The 900 MHz band frequency from the RX VCO, the 450 MHz band frequency from the TX VCO, and the

10.25 MHz reference oscillator frequency are frequency divided by a frequency divider controlled by the CPU

to create the 12.5 kHz comparison frequency. The phase comparator determines the phase difference be-

tween the TX and RX frequencies and the reference frequency, and supplies a control voltage via pin 7 or pin

18 to the appropriate VCOs so that the desired TX and RX frequencies are maintained.

The output from the TX VCO is multiplied by 2 internally by the IC, resulting in a 900 MHz band signal that is

then output to pin 2. Also, the RX VCO signal is supplied to the first mixer built into the IC.

Circuit Diagram

Buffer

_k--'-<_2. Multiplier[

TXVCO_ [_ Divider I

, Buffer

Phase

, Comparator

1 . _ StandardJ .I T

o oi,,a,e

', Buffer

I '@ M,XER,.PUT

Divider _ RXVCO

,_ Buffer

Phase T

Comparator (_

Divider I

MIXER OUTPUT

_)<---- RST }

_<--- SI from CPU

_<---- CPS

(2) TX VCO, RX VCO

TX VCO and RX VCO are module as shown below table.

Pin Layout

Oscillator

Frequency

TXVCO RXVCO

MOD GND OUT

t__J ',.... ', %_;

E ]

'---I ;.... :"H:I

CONTROLGND BiAS

VOLTAGE VOLTAGE

Shield Case side View

Portable Handset 463.05~463.775MHZ

Base Unit 451.05~451.775MHZ

MOD GND OUT

,__.; ',.... ', ,__;

E 3

l---i _.... i _---t

CONTROLGND BIAS

VOLTAGE VOLTAGE

Shield Case side View

Portable Handset 891.4N892.85MHZ

Base Unit 936.8~938.25MHZ

Output -6dB +2dB

Level

Control 0.5-2.5V DC

Voltage

- 175--

--I

"1o

.-I

IKX-F900

(3) Receiver RF Circuit ( ): Portable Handset

The electric wave received from the antenna ia attenuated by the SAW filter F302 (F402) except the received fre-

quency band Then it is amplifier Q304 (Q404) and Q303 (Q403), and supplied to the IC301 (IC401) pin 23

(MIXER input).

Circuit Diagram

R312

IC301 04 ANT

(_327 "

MIXER IN _ _ : o_ I

C390

(4) MIXER IF Circuit ( ): Portable Handset

The reception frequency band signal supplied to the pin 23 MIXER input of IC301 (IC401) is converted into a 10.7

MHz first IF signal by the mixer circuit, using the reception local signal. The result is then output to pin 13 MIXO.

The resonator circuit consisting of L304, C336 (L404, C436) resonates at 10.7 MHz. The 10.7 MHz IF signal is fil-

tered by ceramic filter F303 (F403) and then supplied to IF amplifier Q305 (Q405).

Circuit Diagram

4<.-.--

IC301

__ Buffer_ RX Signal

I otM,xE.% .,x,.

C338

-41_ - _ _ . '_MIXEROUT

-I- R320 1stIF

-176-

KX-F900

(5) TX Power Circuit (): Portable Handset

After being multiplied by 2 inside IC301 (IC401) to make it a 900 MHz band frequency, the transmission signal

is amplified by Q301 and Q302 (Q401 and Q402) and frequency elements outside of the transmission fre-

quency are attenuated b_t dielectric filter F301 (F401). The signal then passes through a transmission-recep-

tion matching circuit and supplied to the antenna terminal.

Circuit Diagram

R302

o_E--

8:Z-

R304[-_' /

)Q302

IC301

C303 F301 C354 •ANT

(6) Second Mixer, Detector, Carrier Sense Circuit ( ): Portable Handset

The 10.7 MHz IF signal from Q305 (Q405) passes through pin 16 of IC302 (IC402) and is input to the second

mixer built into the IC. The reference oscillator frequency from IC301 (IC401) is used as the second local sig-

nal. After being converted into a 450 kHz second IF by the second mixer, the signal is wave detected and out-

put to pin 9 as a low-frequency signal. This signal is output as the AF output signal and, at the same time,

used for e(ectric field determination. The FM noise is filtered by a 10 kHz BPF comprising pins 10 and 11 and

then amplified. Then it is rectified by D301 (D401) and D302 (D402), and input to the switching block consist-

ing of pins 12 through 14.

Circuit Diagram

SQL<

AF<

D302

R331 C340

Carrier Sense

, 1st IF

R337

-177-

14 Pin

Enable to Electric Field "L"

Disable to Electric Field "H" o

-I

.--L

Q208 I LC_!

VR _

MIC SENEITIVlTY ADJUSTJ- II I ',

Q21o,21, Q217 r--1-I--_ _ ',

IME I I i

SPEAKER j

,, ', _

L........

l D201

l-q, - _ _[_

Q202

MIC MUTE

_. RX V01 IC201O_ SPK MUTE

Q201 CPU

] _ 17 CHARGE

IC204

16 BATrERYLOW

8RESET

IC206 15 POWER down

Q205

_ Q210,Q211 TX POWER

TXB

Q208 RF PANT

Q203 _ IC202,C203

_ RXB RF PANT

TX DATA [

UNLOCK

CLOCK

DATA

RST

FLS

RX DATA

ALARM VOL

ALARM

INTERCOM

TALK

LIGHTED KEY

58 L IGHTED KEY

• RX POWER

)IDIN CLoGMAINKSUB

CLOCK

3L-,n¢lt r,J'

3.992MHz 32.68KHz

X201 X202

0 AGC

VR2

MAX IMUM DEVIATION ADJUST _-0 MOD

VR202

SPK LEVEL ADJUST

_0 AF

_AT-_ Q214

:_ IQ215

UNLOCK

CLOCK

DATA

RST

FLS

4_ _R

63 _D210 1

62 *t_'%D212 +B

_._ D209

÷_ D207

.-4

TX FREQ 926.100 - 927.550MHz

RX FREQ 902.100 - 903.550MHz

BPF

LPF F402 Q404,403 I

AMP I

FREQ 926.100 - 927.550MHz

Q401 Q402

AMP _-_ AMP

INOIlVI:13dO llnOEIIO

1ST IF FREQ IO.7MHz

IC401

1 BPF

F403

I IO.TMHz

I-I 1ST MIXER _-_

_ULT'P",E__,! PL

x2 J _-_' L

--t-t-t-t- t-

2ND IF FREQ 450KHz

04O5 I

1ST IF _ 2ND

AMP iI_ MIXER

k T,_

RX VCO FREQ = 1ST LOCAL FREQ

891.400 ~892.850MHz

RX VCO LOOP

FILTER

J I t

TX VCO FREQ

463.050 ~ 463.775MHz

_REFERENCE[_J

I osc I"1

BPF

IF404 r

I 450KHz I

L..... I

IC402

2ND IF [_ DISCRIMI

AMP _NATER

_Io_.2_MHz 0,,01.402

I ' _--IOETEC'O"/

BUFFER J

AMP I

NOISE

AMP

GND

,2-_

IAFOUT_ ©

I I

AGO o

FL$ 0

X401

10.250MHz

UNLOCK 0

l CLOCK 0

DATA 0

RST O

IC401,Q404,Q403

RXVCO,(_05

IC402

_VCO,C_02,(_O 1

RXB o

3.9V 0

TXB 0

MOD o

"-lq

Kx:F900 I

13-7. CIRCUIT OPERATION OF PORTABLE HANDSET

(1) Power Supply Ciurcuit

As indicated in Fig.40, voltage is supplied separately to each block. In order to ensure that the RF block in

particular has a stable fixed-voltage power supply, the RF block is equipped with a dedicated stabilized power

supply. In the standby mode, pin 58 drops at set intervals from high to low level, resulting in an intermittent recep-

tion signal. In the talk mode, pins 59 and 58are low level and power is supplied to all the circuitry.

Circuit Diagram

RX POWER I

sw1

Q203 R_

PU RX POWER

TX POWER I

205

SPK AMP SW

_ )_CPU TX POWER

>RINGER(Q212,Q213)

• CPU (IC201)

• DATA AMP(Q215,Q214)

IF Part (RF BLOCK )

• RF BLOCK

• COMPANDER (IC202)

(IC203)

•RF BLOCK, MICAMP(Q208)

>SPK AMP(Q210,Q211)

(2) Data Reception Circuit

The wave detection signal from the RF block has high frequency elements eliminated by a CR filter consisting of

R258 and C244. Then it is amplified by Q215 and, once again, high frequency elements are eliminated by R255

and C243. After this, the signal is amplified by Q214 and input to pin 50 of the CPU. (The cutoff frequency is 500

Hz.) The data output waveform is a block pulse. To inhibit block pulse noise, the gain of the amplifier is limited

and modulation is clipped at 3 kHz.

Circuit Diagram

-R_57

1._ _ iQ215_ from

RF BLOCK AF Output

-180-

KX-F900

(3) Ringer Circuit

If the ringer volume is set to low and the key is entered occurs, an alarm tone is output from pin 45 of the CPU

and input to Q212. This causes Q213 to turn off and results in a softer beep tone.

If the ringer volume is set to high, Q213 turns on and results in a louder beep tone.

Circuit Diagram

SPEAKER

_CPU ALARM

CPU ALARM

VOLUME

(4) Reception Signal Circuit

The receiver circuit comprises expander IC202, side tone control IC IC208, and a speaker amplifier.

After being adjusted to the appropriate level by VR202, the signal passes through a 3 kHz LPF and an ex-

pander built into IC202. It is then input to side tone IC IC208. The side tone IC is connected to the microphone

amplifier. If a large input is input to the microphone, the gain control built into IC208 lowers the gain to reduce

the output of the speaker amplifier. If there is no large input being input to the microphone, the amplifier in

IC208 is set to standard gain. Consequently, the sound of the received audio signal becomes fainter when the

user is talking in a loud voice and the side tone level is lowered. When the user talks more softly, the received

audio signal is audible at the standard level.

Also, in addition to the input from the microphone, the ACG signal from the RF block is input to the side tone IC.

When the base unit and portable handset are separated from each other, causing the signal to become weaker,

the DC voltage rises and this voltage is input to pin 5 of IC208. When the DC voltage input to pin 5 rises, the

gain control built into IC208 lowers the gain. Consequently, the reception level is lowered when the reception

signal is weak and there is more noise. This prevents the noise from becoming too noticeable.

The reception signal passes through receiver volume selector switch Q217, and then drives the receiver

speaker.

RXVOL H : LOW LEVEL

L : HIGH LEVEL

SPK MUTE H : SPEAKER ON

L : SPEAKER OFF o

-I

"10

,-4

-181--

KX-F900

Circuit Diagram

IC202 EXPANDER

3KHz LPF

RF Part -_

AF __ VR202

Receive level adjust

[__ IC208

I I I _ I Sidetone

_ ___JcontrollC

Gain control RI :0_38

R265

RX VOL

SPK MUTE (_)

SPEAKER

SPK MUTE

(5) Sending Signal

The audio signal from the microphone is amplified by Q208 and then passes through a limiter, mute circuit,

compander, and 3 kHz LPF built into IC202. It is then mixed with the TX DATA signal from the CPU, the

maximum modulation is adjusted by VR201, and input to the modulator in the RF block.

Circuit Diagram

R217

CPU R250

TX DATA_ T

CPU MIC MUTE ..LR229

LIMITER H_'ICOMPANDER_ _ :

IC202 i

............................................................. i

,_]_o RF Part

MOD

VR201

MAXIMUM

Deviation adjust

-- 182-

KX-F900

(6) ReseUPowe_ uow.luattery LowilD

When the battery is installed in the portable hm}dset, the reset circuit consisting of R289, C255, and Q204

functions, inputting a reset signal to the CPU. This ensures that the unit will operate normally without the user's

needing to switch the power off and on. When the voltage from the batteries drops to 3.5 V, 3.5 V voltage

detector IC204 operates and inputs a battery low signal to the CPU. This causes the battery low LED to flash

on and off. If voltage continues to drop and reaches 3.2 V, 3.2 V voltage detector IC206 operates and outputs

a power down signal to the CPU. This causes power to be cut off automatically and prevents the battery from

over discharging. Q201 is a charge detector that informs the CPU whether or not the portable handset is

currently being charged. During charging, ID data is sent from the base unit. Q202 receives this ID data and

sends it to the CPU.

Circuit Diagram

[]

R289 C255

D201 'W_,_ I I r_204_:

R286 IC206 _ I"' :_

Battery_e_e[ _I--- "L £ , R208 _>Q

Q20_ R205

R201 "_ _2_ R206

'_' .1_

R202 -£-

C204 D213

RESET

Powerdown

Bakery low

Charge

183

KX-F900

•FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

DC voltage measurements are take,, wLth Ob_;lilo_bUp_:

or tester from ground.

The schematic diagram and circuit board may be

modified at any time with the development of new

technology.

v=ca_. It General Jl Zenef II LED IIPhotoDikode

CathodelJ Cathode/| Cathode][ Cathodel/AnOde

j;llLbpul[ant safety notiou

.... ............ ........ ................: ....

-184-

1 I 2 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (DIGITAL BOARD)

5 I 6 I7 I 8

(Bottom View)

R55 R53 R5 R56 R54 R52

C13 • •

147

Note:

1. This circuit shown inL__] on the conductor indicates primea

circuit on the back side of the printed circuit board.

Note:

1. This oircuit shown in--on the conductor indicates printed

circuit on the front side of the printed circuit board.

m-185-

i I 2 I 3 I

iKX'FO001 1........ .... KX'_,O0---]

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (DIGITAL. BOARD)

I 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 10 I 11

(Component View)

Note:

1. This circuit shown in _ on the conductor indicates printed

circuit on the back side of the printed circuit board.

Note:

1. This circuit shown in [___1 on the conductor indicates printed

circuit on the front side of the printed circuit boarcr.

-186-

1L3 L 4 J_ _L_

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (DIGITAL CIRCUIT)

I 8 I 9 [ 10 I 11 __ 12 13 _ 14 j Ib 16 1/ 1 1u

ivlL, l i LJi

DRIVE _

. __ _

÷5v

CNB R42

/S_o I B 2

3ENSOR v_ ITX MOTOR

+I<

TP14

VIDEO

C40 ZO. t

C42 *5VF

JI5P

C43

JI5P

+24V

03 --

v, lo I Do IO !7!-- IN2

tt lot zt s I !.;

12 IQ2 121 s I ir_

13 I 03 ][3 I 4 I _)rM(

_04 z4F-- _

ic7 I

LEO LED-ON/OFF /

LEO-0N/OFF

CUT-POS

TP9 (:> AM0

+SV

-t

CN9

Na _

NA 3

HEAD-BUS ,.# TP5

MU 1Uri..

[)RIVE _" "-4

+SV

CNIO

NS _

NA 3

D 2

A !

RX MOTOR

[DP21

[DP22

[DP23

[DP24

[DP25

[0P26

[0P27

[OPiO

[OPt!

ALE

RMO

RM1

RM2

TP6

÷= i

ASICl

+24V

ICI

24MHz

TP7

+5V

_DVSS ADRIO

ADR9

AOR8

AOR7

AOR6

ADR5

ADR4

DVSS

ADR3

ADR2

ADRI

ADRO

DBO

DBt

DB2

OB3

DVSS

DVDD

DB4

DB5

DB6

OB7

IOPI2

IOP13

lOP!4

OVDD

XROMCS

XNOMCS

XANLGCS --

XRESCS!

XRESCS2

XORO

+24V

47u_

R×E _

D4 --

,.1 Io10% iol 7 l - B_,

!_ 16i lil 6IR_.,

1316_ i§1 _ I Ru0.

I_ ' =_--L_--405 15

4R_V_ 0_! NOTml

TH N/OFF

......JuuLo

II/ ApO-e

\AO 12

\ A4 B

\ A5 7

\A6 6

\ A7 5

\ All 25

\ A12 4

\RBAO 28

\RBAt 29

\RBA4 30

]c2 ROM

•AO DO 13 O0 /

At DI 14 01 /

A2 02 15 02 /

• A3 D3 t7 03 /

A4 D4 18 04 /

A5 D5 19 D5 /

A6 D6 20 06 /

A7 D7 21 [37 /

A9 +SV

AiO PG'--M3t1..___

Art VPP _

AI2 iCE

AI3

A14

A15 .

A16 .

tB___ "_

__ u

OE GNn

IC-50CKET _7

I00 R7

IHEHMAL HEAL.) iLMP

TH-HEAD

IC37 MIBODP C39 MO. t

R4B 56K E

RM0 .... _._[-!_

RM1 ___

RM2 __F-l__

RM3 _J---I__

RXE J---L_

o_i_#i_i_i<,,i,,itIOl/<,,,, oo888go8 <_

_I ....... ,LAT L, , , ......

I I I I I I I I I,I _Z£1_m_ 5V ;IB2T Lj h ,,Jd teliilJui,Jlu <

mJuuuuuuu --

I=r ,<,vU-

t'-LJ_,,t.i i J _ ,III1I.DA+A +_ B4_ l-! Ills waveform wili

"_ I I I_ It _TI _T I T_ I 5v _'_--_o-i olsochange.

\TTTT

_l_l_li\- ..... i i /,,. zo.,

lISt,ILl ........ +,zo.,! +v

II_FI_I_FI --- € ILC' -- I

_NC OVO;I TT TI

RA1 IO0 OVD,23 II I /

15 DO DVDI 5D 1 lli

.• }___

*5V .... +24V 2

o .o ,

R63

\ AO I0

At 21A2 9

\ A3 8

\ A4 7

\A5 6

\ AB 26

\ A7 4

AS 5A9 25

\ AID 23

\ All 24

\RBAO 3

\RBA! 2

\RBA2 1

It3 SRAM

[

*5v

\AO 60

\AI 59

\A2 58

\ A3 57

\A4 56

+5v

DAT-B

A Ol 19

A Ol 1B

A OI 17

A Ol 16

A 01 15

A OI 13

A01 12

A01 11

A VCC ! 2B

A_g _01,___.__

WE _

-- GND

+5VF

R35 _ 4.7K 64

TP1 090

TP2 085

TP3 0

TP4 O 83

CNI

124V I

GNO!

GN02

GNO3

*SV

RNU

TMU

. R\

TONE!

ANALOG- _

÷24V

-÷

0 !

:02 +SV/ 476 - " 7" R92 £

03 DVA _ l C7t lC 2 I+ C34

D4 DVA _-LZO. t -Lzo. I _ 22Du IOK _ 08

o, ov, ,ooo

07 OVA IC76

C73 == t40,1 _T-'----vvv-- ZO 24 _

44 r----'-'_ FIg0 F1BK Tr71 B . • r

OVO2 TXDU C74 NO. _ - _ 7 R 2 OK

pVD2 RXI_ __ _ IC!0 _vv',,

OYO2

4B I[I I _ I __

BS,, T_"v T T _- !°°u I I -- . 1oo

__ L_ I I !6VRs5 3.3K Ice_ No.1 I _ _ w,.-

oP!! 1oo Tn" 7-_ _ i ,, _ !_'-I ....

GP13 GPD; _ ''' _ i]m= vvv 41 ..Z._. ,._I' _ _lll. lll,i_ _+! 3=

GP16 GPD: 2 I -TJ/-/ I "_ .... 4_T

o., " b- - L

GPI9GPD! C 11 C88

GP2IGP20 GPo:GPO'_ _ _._ I _'_ K330P IOu _ :ZI.D

... _7 7

+5V

24Mitz

°°' /Wt

•Jiooo_ /

// R37 C90

TXLDSS"

TXD

DCLK _XLDSS2

DCLKI TXLDSSI

RXD

BYPASS

R_ DADUT

W-_ DAIF

ADOUI

EYEX ADIF

EYEY XCLk

;YECLK YCLk

;CLKINI

_YECLKX PORI

_YESYNC

36 AG

B8 7"_ "

2_L

CCO-ON/OFF

CDL-B

66 _24V

•R65

LED ARRAY

L5 :1 LC2

+5V

-_ (]20

TPD 0 2_

_,o_

3YNCINI XTL(

3YNCIN2 XTL1

_CVD

_CVI NC

ISWGAIND NC

!SMGAINI NC

L-- NC

ICS NC

ENB5 NC

tCO6

J!OOOP

150 J12P

c:3x3

R3B J- C91

_w II

0 dlBP

100 +5V

R61

!OK

C65

+SV

R67

T_P_O

TPI 1

WATCH DOG ERROR

_5V (NORMAL)

___r-.V

_td_ Do9 E:rrcr 00;0r)

CCO-ON/OFF /

+SV

:ESET

+SVP i

:...........L i CO7

_i (ii)

OP-B

oo_i

xx.J (-;

° °

.@D_0m_0 O0

R29 100

R30 4.7K

COL-B

II-AX IXSIg,,<.,

I•• FAX RX Sig:_al

ICll

AQ:Q-_

OA+-B __

ANALOG-2

ON2

i 3 IRD I

;R59 !OK C56 NO. I 4 /CS I

TONE2 TONE2/BELL 5 OnO0 i

BELL 7 02

8 D3

IR60 IOK C57 N0. I"g 04

+5V

--I

CBUSY l

too

1oo

too

,oo ANALOG-3

tOO

tO0

SOD CN3

tO0

0 R70 tO0

R72 tO0

CCD

R71 iDO

R73 I_0

R75 OC58 MD.I

R74

FII

F2 /

FTG /

" BAT lO

PI_XRST

OP-PANEL

\ CSI

CSDCBUSY2

t).Nut Oboe:

CPC

CSI

CCLK

CBUSYI

CSO

CBUSY;

187-

1 2 __ 3 __ 4 1__ 5 .... j__ _6 _L_ 7 _L 8

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (ANALOG CIRCUIT)

] 9 1 10 1 11 1 18

RII6 5,6

0169

Cl70

*5VD

Olol -_ _

I--T_- .....T-÷_,,......

o= 1

*5v0 C102 I

POt03 _ o "_ R28_ i.SK

N 4 *5VO

I _J_>[ _I 1 -I " I SELL R_81 31K I:1104 4:K

/I sV _

_-_ OV

0103 250V 0.22,

o s_._o,,,_ ,-,,,_,_,_v ; b_°,

DIAL PULSE

l102

÷l;/

OIAL-P

EXRO0_

LISt

L_ ) .......CN_.t.

•_! .....

_ !),_} I

+5VA

. 4,1V

2.2K CN152

R159

-'V_-.

_01

R_i N_!

_ ^€_¢N-----

L-,--

Ll05

L106

ll2 Zl 0

POSI0J Jj_ ILLJACK

__ 5Al01

__ SA102

R223

NCw4

_Ll03

JJ2 EXTEL

L_04 3

+5vo

._ PC105

EXHOOK2

8ELL

OIAL-p _

_XHOOK

i---

Iii

+2_4V

0251 o

m _

•.v, % II

R252 i.2RK

_ m

+24V

0271

+5VA

-I

LRL_

SPMUTE

+5VA

SPWUTE

-_ 2.1V

{

C157 K3300P

_ Z z =_= z _SPPRIN

_c EXOUT !! ! SPP_OUT

L_NE_T )! SPOUT 38 SP-SIG

64 V_EF2 SPTONE 37

--_ ALCIN CLTONE

ALCOET _" _:_ ........ _OUT

L _ PROUT2 DVOD

69 RECPRIN P42

70 RECRROUT P4_

71 LSRXOUT P40

72 PLYOUT P33

30 PLYIN P32 _ II V

74 LST×0UT ]CtS_ P3i 27 VOL3 R245 12K ON HOOK:5V

10NE:OV HO(

76 TONEINI I,_ FUll P23

77 TONEIN2 P22

-- 70 TONEIN3 /0Vor5V P2t

79 TONEIN4 /Lp20

AOND _DOND

d_ _ _ 0PgRT .

*5VD _+5VD

!5_273 SH274

_76 lO0 27'

OFF HOOK:0V

_j_ 5V Portable Handset TX Signal

Portable Handset RX Signal

--188

KX-F900 KX-F900

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (ANALOG BOARD)

5 I 6 I 7 I 8 I j._ ,1 [ IZ ./__

(Component View)

SAIOL

_102

L106

R103

R'N6

EXT TEL N

PCI05 PC101 PC102

1029Z

ztet

JlSO ¢N151

189-

.....KX_Fg001I KX:FgO_.....

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (ANALOG BOARD)

I 5 I 0 I 7 I 8 10 11 12

(Bottom View)

_i_, ....

D101 L103

_190

I..-L._ L_ _ __J

CCD BOARD

(Component View)

(Bottom View)

KX-F900 1 KX-F900

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (CCD)

I 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 I 9 10 11 I12

CCD CIRCUIT

__-L_.F-q_.F-L

_H.FL_FLJ3d3d3_

_G_IN --I F t.:,_,,,_S___lL

I........ I

9.216 ms

_-SV

0;' __

RB03

COD

1208

lVDD

% 2

4_S

2t SH

VSS

NC NC

-- NC NC

NC NC

DOS

3.5V /

3.5V_ _[ 0.5_0.6V

9.216 ms

I-- o

RB02

o o

,q _ [ -- --

_ E

R801

i %s[

oV I

9.216 ms

o -t

_ o_ -

_BO

191 -

I KX-FgOO11 KX-FO00

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY)

4 I s I o I 7 I 8 I 10 11 .... j12

(Component View)

(_ CN31

PC102 0102 .

PRIMARY

-.NV-

......

8 CN302 I : R202 ...........

(Bottom View)

.....

DIOI

mmmm

192-

I....Kx-F90oI l---K-x-Fg00I

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY)

5 I 6 I 7 I 8 I 10 11 12

F101

THI01

-I 0

ZNR102 ZNR103

Z_ C102

C103 C104

0.001F_0.001

z_R101 1a

Z_L101

----@_(N---

ZNR101

C101 /_

0.1

CN31

,/_ C105

, II

0.0047

GND

Rlll

Rl13

27K

IC101

• rrl_

R127 C124

2.2K 0.047

100k

D104

50V

CN301

H24V

5 H24V

4 GND

3 GND

2 GND

1 +5V

CN302

8 P-ON

7 OUT

6 M24V

5 GND

4 GND

3 GND

2 +5V

1 +5V

-193-

i__ L

1,3,5,7,

8,10-14,I |

1_9,2o,/J

_t2''_/

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (OPERATION PANEL BOARD)

4 I s I 6 I 7 I 8 I

(Component View)

(Bottom View)

!! o ¸

• • • • []

194

[]

L .... 12 ...... _.L

JKX-F900 I- Kx-Fg00

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (OPERATION PANEL CIRCUIT)

5 I 6 I 7 I 8 I 10 11 12

R349

R348

R347

R346

R345

R344

R343

R342

5332

5328

$324

FLASH

$320

5316

ONE3

5312

ONE2

5308

ONE 1

$304

KSL2

KSLI

$33!

5327

$323

REDIAL/PAUSE

5319

5315

LONER

531t

0NE5

$307

0NE4

5303

5330

5326

5322

MUTE

5318

5314

S3tO

5306

5302

+5V

KSLO

AUTO RECIVE

$329

OIRECIORY

$325

HELP

5321

SP-PHONE

$317

V0LURE v

$3t3

5TART/COPY/SET

S309

STOP

$305

VOLUNE _

5301

+5V

_eo

R340

150

R339

180

R338

'kA/',,,_

180

R337

IBO

R336

'VV'v---

180

R335

'VVV

_80 o

R334

leo

LOCATORilNTERCOM

$33_ 0304

RESOLUTION MENU

5333L_ 03o3

+SV

. z. c3_ol

+bV

190 VVV- 1309

180 V'v%

1307

180

R322

+5V

_ m m'

R328

LED305

470 f,G_

R326 _J)

(_,_)

+SV

LE0306

LEO304

(,_

vo0 17

vo0 AO

:SET

"TXO 33

RXO 32

5CL 31

_TC 34

TART 35 4

LED 234

05 27

06 28

07 29

LED 2 _

LEO 41

LEO 38 _ /OV

LED 37 --

,ED 36 LED:ON

LED:Of:F

R394

LED303

_bV ,by

J LJ LJ L_,v,

KSL_ --_

K5L2 |

KS[ II

KSL0 I

KIN/ I

KIN_ I

KIN5 I

KIN4 I

K]N:_ I

KIN2 I

KIN1 I

KINO •

XLDI4 1

XLD13 I

LED8 J

IEOll

LEDIO

XLDI2

--XLD_5

LED|

GND

al;l TXO

6SCLK

8_ START

9 NO

+SV 1+5V

EN302

i!l V55

VOD

R/_

-- E

R325

-----_)

R323

470

_y'J

*sv ,_sv LCD CONTRAST

R354

470

LED301

LED302

(,G',_

LEO307

AUTO RECEIVE _=

SP-PHONE

,2,_ 8_ OV

_7 _

+5V +5V

oct_

=I30_ 1

+5V

4_I30

_o ( ) : NOt US,_G

+SV

m 5380

R329 4_ 7

FOR CHECKER

R350

R3gl

R392 0

PAPER SET PAPER TOP

-195-

f oo I....... I KX.FgOO-¸ ]

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (CORDLESS BASE UNIT)

s I 6 I 1_ IU 1_L_ ;¢Z _L_

Note:

1. This circuit shown in ___1 on the conductor indicates printed

circuit on the back side of the printed circuit board.

(Component View)

(Bottom View)

! i OO []

Note:

1. This circuit shown in _ on the conductor indicates printed

circuit on the front side of the printed circuit boarcl.

-196-

[ Kx:_,oo1 Kx:_;oo I

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (CORDLESS BASE UNIT)

s I 0 I7I8I_J_ '° ,_ " I 12 _L

-107-

2 1 ,3 I 4 I

KX'F900 KX-F900-

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (RF UNIT)

5I6I7I_1_ i ........ IL) __1 11 12

C613e

C612 •

(Component View)

ii!iti¸ i

D302 D301

IC 302

¢6 ii

198

(Flow Solder Side View View)

KX-F900 I KX-F900

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (RF UNIT)

I6I 7 I 10 11 12 L__

CN301

0308 Q309

D310

C304

_ _OOOP

C303

,o L 31B RX VCO

R338

2.0 10.25MHz

10.TMHz

R320

4"/

i..........

;;Pollabie Handset AX Signal

-199-

KX-F°00i I "X-Fg00']

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (PORTABLE HANDSET)

I 5 I 6 I 7 I810 11 i2

i !

(Flow Solder Side View View)

(Component View)

-200

R218 o

C220

_247

22K

R2G£

1 OK

SP+

C241 1_

C259 1.

KX-F900 J 1 KX-Fg00 J

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (PORTABLE HANDSET)

I 6 I 7 I 8 I

1L207

33O

C40G

_ooop _j-

R404

£_OB

TXVCO

R402 C404

L422

R250

:248

L402

R212

IC201 _L s_

}3,o

t255

C246

20dB

TXO

VCC

TXB

) TX[

) G.D

PD1

VCC

X401

M,_IN(

VCC (

RXB (

PD2

RST (

L400

FL401 L421

D403

R412

L ............

R432

KX-F900 KX-F900

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (CHARGE)

4 I 5I6I 7 I 8 I 9 10 11 12

LEl)651

I^IBIclDIEIFIoI,

IAIBIclII2bI41sI61 IsIglAIBIcI__

,DIP

L65"/

MAIN CHARGE

SP CHARGE

S_CHARGE LED

M_CHARGE LED ,

CN652

CN654

0---

J551

EEl-- -

EEF----

J652

J653

J654

R65t

270

R652

,/vv

27o

LF)

I,p

LE0651

LED652

CNbb 1

-J

_202 -

KX-F900

TERMINAL GUIDE OF IC'S, TRANSISTORS AND DIODES

2_14

PQVICX58257C

AN 1431T

PQVIBA12003

23 22

33_12

44 1

MN53007QAF

PQVI0008GE12

PQVlMM1245BF AN6183SE1

PQVIMC34119M PQVlNJM2113V

PQVINJM4558M PQVlNJM2903M

73 72

10_37

109<'_'_ _"....... 36

144 1

PFVIT7D56

PQVIDBL5018

32 1

PQVIS79164FU

48_17

4_..--76

64 1

MN 151233KZAB

2SK543 1

pQk/TFSIOKM10

_" 16

PFWlF900M

PFVIFA5317P

60_ 21

AN6116FAQ

AN6165SB

PQVIM64084AF

PQVIXCC3501 P

PQVlXC3002PR

PQVIXCC3202P

PQVITC4066BF

PFVINJ2360D

80_31

81_ .-'_ 30

100 1

PFVIR96DFXL

PQVITC4069UBF

2SD1858R

2SD1921Q 2SB1322

pQVTDTCl14EU PQVTDTC144E pQV3-D-I-C143E

pQVTD'IA143EU PQVTD123J106 PQVTDTB123E

pQVTD123"I"146 pQVTDTC144TU 2SB970A

2SD1819A 2SD601R 2SC4571R77

2SC4226P,24 2SC4227R34 2SC4116

-203-

KX-F900 )

2SA1627

MA6D49

Cat h°de@Anod e

MA2Slll MA8047

PQVDRB751 H4

PQVDPY1112H

PQVDBR1112H

Cathod_

PQVDSLR325MC

PQVDSR325CA47

2SC4604 2SC2235

MA165

PQVDAK04A

PQVDS5688G

PQVDERA1802

PQVDERA81004

PFVDAG01A

ode

MA2300

PQVDD2SBA60

Cat,__h_ An°de

MA4220

MA4180 MA7200

Cathode

PQVDS1ZB40F1

(_ Cathode

Anode

RLS71 MAll0

hode

Anode

MA3062 PQVDSB703Q

1SS131 lSSl19

MA4075

PQVDHZS2B1

204-

TOOLS

J KX-F900

PCB3

ECl

EC3 EC4

PCB5

EC2

PCB2 EC14

EC11

PCB1

,EC5

EC1

PCB8

""" PCB6-1

EC17

EC13

PCB6

-205-

--r_0o.......I

CABINET , MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PARTS LOCATION

1. Operation Panel Section

- 206-

2.Upper Section

JKX-F900 J

52 /

68 (_) ;

i /

,;40-'

62-1

57 56

Note:

Attach the pad

plate to the top

of the cutter

unit as shown

above.

-207-

[KX-F900

3.Lower Section

147 108

(_) 139 PCB5

/144

(D' 140

®&

145

120

127

137

138

- 208-

_. C(.;i3 SecI:io=_

IKX-F900 I

LED AR_

COD CHASSIS 1 POitNT(_

Note; Place the LED Array in the

center of point® as shown above.

172 (_

177

-209 --

KX-F900 1

5. PORTABLE HANDSET

208-1

208

204_

205

206

E902

E903

208 201

20;-

-210-

IKX-F9O0

6. ACTUAL SIZE OF SCREWS AND WASHER

Part No. Figure

(_) XTW3+Sl OP

(_ XTW3+W6P

(_ PJHE5065Z

(_) XSN3+W6FZ [_]]]]]]]

(_ XYC3+CF6 _]]]]]

(_ XSB4+6

(_ XYN2+C8 I_ _

(_ XWC4B

(_ XYN3+FIO _]]]]_]_

(_) XTB3+ 12G

(_) XTW3+CS12P

(_ XTB26+8J 0]]]]]_

(_ XTW26+12F

(_) XTB3+ 10G {_]_333_

• 211-

_-....KX-Fg_00I

ACCESSORIES AND PACKING MATERIALS

A2_,'

Battery

(KX-A92)

A6, A7, A9

Note: The rechargeable Ni-Cd battery

KX-A92 are available through sales

route o4Panaso_c-

-212-

KX-F900

REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only. Referto the simplified manual (cover)for otherareas.

Notes: Model KX-F900

1. RTL (Retention Time Limited)

The marking (RTL) indicates that the Retention Time is limited for this item.

After the discontinuation of this assembly in production, the item will continue to be

available for a specific period of time. The retention period of availability is

dependent on the type of assembly, and in accordance with the laws governing

pert and product retention.

After the end of this period, the assembly will no longer be available.

2. Important safety notice

Components identified by the Z_ mark special characteristics important for safety.

When replacing any of these components, use only manufacturer's specified parts.

3. The S mark indicates service standard parts and may differ from production parts.

4. RESISTORS & CAPACITORS

Unless otherwise specified,

All resistors are in ohms ( _ ) K=1000_, M=1000K_

All capacitors are in MICRO FARADS ( pF ) P= I_I_F

*Type &Wattage of Resistor

Type

ERC:Solid [ERX: Metal Film IPQ4R:Carbon I

ERD: Carbon IERG: Metal Oxide _ERS: Fusible Resistor

PQRD: Carbon IER0: Metal Film _ERF: Cement Resistor

Watta_le

110.16:f/sw 114,25:f/4w 112:t/2w It: 1w 12:2w 13:3wI

*Type &Voltage of Capacitor

Type

ECFD: Semi-Conductor IECCD, ECKD, ECBT, PQCBC: Ceramic

ECQS: Styrol IECQE, ECQV, ECQG: Polyester

PQCUV: Chip _ECEA, ECSZ: Electrolytic

ECQMS: Mica |ECQP: Polypropylene

Volta_le

ECQ Type

1H: 50V

2A: 100V

2E: 250V

2H: 500V

Ref. No 1

1-1

1-2

16-1

ECQG I ECSZ Type

ECQV Type I

05: 50V IOF: 3.15V

1: 100V ItA: 10V

2: 200V I1V: 35V

I0J: 6.3V

Others

0J: 6.3V I iV: 35V

1A: t0V I50, 1H: 50V

1C: 16V 1J: 63V

1E, 25: 25V 2A: 100V

Part No. IPart Name &Description

CABINET, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PARTS

PFYGF900M

PFGP1025Z

PFGG1008X2

PFUS1025Z

PFGV 1002Z

PFGD1004Z

PFBXl011Z1

PFGP1017Z

PFBX1013Xt

PFBX1012Y2

PFBC1004Z1

PQDR9685Z

PFAVLMG161C8

PFJSf0R21Z

PFDE1020Z

PFDE1019Z

PFUS1027Z

PFYC2F780M

PFHX1081Z

PFUS1026Y

PQDR 10005Z

PFDF1005Z

PFHR1019Z

PFUS1024Z

PFUSt023Y

PFHG1020Z

PFHR1018Z

1. OPERATION PANEL SECTION)

)PERATION GRILLE ASS'Y

LCD PANEL

GRILLE

SPRING, ROLLER

TRANSPARENT PLATE (for TEL. CARD)

TEL. CARD

BUTTON, DIAL

LED COVER

BUTTON, FUNCTION

BUTTON, DIALER

BUTTON, START/COPY/SET

ROLLER, SUPPORT

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

CONNECTOR, 10 PIN

LEVER, READ DETECTION

LEVER, DOCUMENT DETECTION

SPRING, DOCUMENT LEVER

OPERATION GRILLE COVER ASS'Y

COVER (READING SHEET)

SPRING, SUPPORT ROLLER

ROLLER, SUPPORT EXIT PRINT

SHAFT, SUPPORT RLLER

LEVER, SEPARATE SPRING ADJUST

SPRING, SEPARATION

SPRING, DOCUMENT FEED

RUBBER, SEPARATION

SEPARATION RUBBER HOLDER

I Pcs

S 1

:_ef. No.

_0-1

30-1

32-1

36-1

i'1

100

101

102

lO3

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

Part No.

PFYM1 F900M

PFHS1010Z

PFBD1002Z2

P FUS 1022Y

P FUS 1042Z

PFUS1039Y

PFJS09R22Z

PFMH1021Y

PFDG1004Z

PFDJ1007Z

PFDN1006Z

PFJS6R23Z

PFDG1003Z

PFDJ1006Z

PFDN1005Z

PFDE1008X

PFDE1007X

PFDG1013Z

PFDJ1005Y

PFDN1003Z

PFJHS004Z

PFZEF780M

PFHG1025Z

PFHD1003Y

PFYG3F900M

PFHX1098Z

PFJT1001Y

PFUG1006Z

PFKSl006Z2

PFYC1F900M

PFQT1134Z

PFKR1004Z2

PFKRt005Z2

PFUS1034Z

PFDG1002Z

PFJS18R31Z

PQSA 10047Z

PFGP1027Z

PFYFF900M

PFKM1009Z2

PQJM128Z

PQHG556Z

PQJS02Q62Z

PFHG1024Z

PFAS50PTC01Z

PFJS02R20Z

PFUS1029Y

PFDE1010Z

PFDE1009Y

PFDE1011Z

PFZLF780M

PFDJ1007Z

PFDN1004Z

PQUS10014Z

PFDG1012Z

XUC2FY

Part Name &Description

2. UPPER CABINET/

THERMAL HEAD SECTION)

JPPER CABINET ASS'Y

"APE

KNOB, FRONT LID OPEN

SPRING, EARTH

SPRING, THERMAL HEAD

SPRING, EARTH

CONNECTOR, 9 PIN

COVER, PAPER GUIDE

GEAR, DOCUMENT FEED ROLLER

SPACER, ROLLER

ROLLER, DOCUMENT FEED

CONNECTOR, 6 PIN

GEAR, DOCUMENT FEED

SPACER, ROLLER

ROLLER, DOCUMENT FEED

GUIDE, HEAD (RIGHT)

GUIDE, HEAD (LEFT)

GEAR, RECORDING PAPER ROLLER

SPACER, PLATEN

ROLLER, RECORDING PAPER

THERMAL HEAD

CUTTER ASS'Y

PAD PLATE

REVET, HEADER PIN

CUTTER LOWER GUIDE ASS'Y

SPACER (CUTTER SHEET)

BATTERY CHARGE TERMINAL

GUIDE, CUTTER

TRAY, DOCUMENT

ROLL COVER ASS'Y

CAUTION LABEL

GUIDE, DOCUMENT (LEFT)

GUIDE, DOCUMENT (RIGHT))

SPRING, DOCUMENT

GEAR, DOCUMENT GUIDE

CONNECTOR, 18 PIN

ANTENNA

LED COVER

BOTTOM CABINET ASS'Y

(for Handset Cradle)

UPPER CABINET(for Handset Cradle)

3. LOWER CABINET SECTION)

AICROPHONE

RUBBER, MIC COVER

CONNECTOR, 2 PIN

SPACER, SPEAKER

SPEAKER

CONNECTOR, 2 PIN

SPRING, SPEAKER

LEVER, OPEN SENSOR

LEVER, JAM SENSOR

LEVER, PAPER SENSOR

LOCK LEVER ASS'Y

SPACER, ROLLER

ROLLER, SEPARATION

SPRING, ONE WAY

GEAR, SEPARATION ROLLER

RETAINING RING

Pcs

-213-

I-KX'FgO0 I

This replacement parts list is for U.S,A. version only.

:tel. No. Part No.

116 PFJQ1003Z

117 PFJS05R24Z

118 PFUA1002Z

119 PFUS1018X

120 PFDG1008Z

121 PFDG1009Z

122 PFDG1005Z

123 PFUS1019Z

124 PFDE1014Z

125 PFDG1010Z

126 PFDG1006Z

127 PFDE1015Z

128 PFJS02R25Z

129 PQST2A04Z

130 PFJQ1004Z

131 PFJS05R27Z

132 PFUA1003Z

133 PFDG1011Z

134 PFMD1006Z

135 PFDE1017Z

136 PFDE1016Z

137 PFDE1028Z

138 PQFN51Z

139 PQHMl12Z

140 PQJP03S07Z

141 PQJS02Q59Y

142 PFUS1040Z

143 PFUS1017Y

144 PFDG1007Z

145 PFHA1001Z

146 PFGT1135Z

147 PFUS1043Z

170 PFWLF780M

170-1 PFVDSLA30222

171 PFOG10OIZ

172 PFUS1021Z

173 PFOL10OlZ

174 PFHE1004Z

175 PFJS08R26Z

176 PFMD1007Z

177 PFUS1028Z

178 PFOM1003Z

179 PFOM1001Z

180 _FOM1002Z

200 PQAX2P04Z

201 pQJT10112Z

202 pQJT10113Z

203 PQSA10048Z

204 PQSX10043Z

205 PQSX10045Z

206 PQHR10486Z1

207 PQKF10183Z1

208 PFYM2F900M

208-1 PFGT1163Z

208-2 PFQT1205Z

209 PQHS10293Z

Part Name & Description

TX MOTOR

CONNECTOR, 5 PIN

CHASSIS, TX GEAR

SPRING, STATIC ELECTRIC

Pcs

Refer to the simplified manual (cover)for 0the; areas. _1

Ref. No. I Part No. Part Name & Description Pcs

IACCESSORIES AND PACKING MATERIALS

PQKK 10065Z1

:PFYC4F900M

BATTERY COVER 1

(for HANDSET CRADLE)

BATTERY COVER ASS'Y 1

GEAR, IDLER

GEAR, CHANGEOVER

SPRING, TH RUST

'_,RM, CHANGEOVER

SEAR, IDLER

SEAR, CUTTER

ARM, CUTTER

CONNECTOR, 2 PIN

SEESAW SWITCH

RX MOTOR

CONNECTOR, 5 PIN

CHASSIS, RX GEAR

GEAR, IDLER

FRAME, BOTTOM

ARM, CUTTER

LEVER, REMOVE

WASHER

CLAMPER

CONNECTOR, AC IN LET

CONNECTOR, 2 PIN

SPRING, EARTH

SPRING, STATIC ELECTRIC

GEAR, IDLER

RUBBER, LEGS

NAME PLATE

SPRING, COVER OPEN SENSOR

A2-1

:A4

'_.5

1 P1

1P2

1 P3

1 P4

1 P5

1 P6

1PCB1

PQQT11236Y

PQJA200Z

PQJA59V

PQUS10136Z

P FQW 1087Z

PFQXl060Z

PQH P 10023Z

PQQV 10276Z

PFPHIOO4Z

PFPK1139Z

PFPN1045Z

PFPNlO56Z

PQPPIOOO5Z

XZB10X15A04

(for HANDSET)

RECYCLE LABEL 1

POWER CORD .Ah 1

ITELEPHONE CORD • S 1

PAPER STACK 1

QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE 1

INSTRUCTION BOOK 1

RECORDING PAPER 1

ADVANTAGE PROGRAM SHEET 1

PROTECTION COVER (tor UNIT) 1

GIFT BOX 1

ACCESSORY BOX 1

COMPLETED PAD 1

PROTECTION COVER 1

(for PRINTED MATERS

PROTECTION COVER 1

(for BATTERY COVERS

PFWP1F900M

DIGITAL BOARD PARTS

DIGITAL P.C.BOARD ASS'Y (RTL)

4. CCD SECTION)

CHASSIS ASS'Y

LED ARRAY

TARGET GLASS

SPRING, LENS

LENS

NUT

CONNECTOR, 8 PIN

COVER, CHASSIS

SPRING, MIRROR

MIRROR, SMALL

MIRROR, LARGE

MIRROR, MIDDLE

(5. PORTABLE HANDSET SECTION

SPEAKER

CHARGE TERMINAL

ANTENNA

KEYBOARD SWITCH

SPEAKER HOLDER

CABINET COVER

FRONT CABINET

qAME PLATE

-'AX REMOTE LABEL

COVER

ICl

IC2

IC3

IC7

IC8

IC9

IC10

ICll

(36

PFVIT7D56

PFWIF900M

PQVICX582570

PQVIBA 12003

PQVIBA12003

PQVIMM1245BF

PQVINJM4558M

PQVIR96DFXL

2SB1322

PQVTDTC114EU

2SB1322

PQVTDTC114EU

PQVTDTA143EU

PQVTDTC114EU

2SD1819A

RLS71

MA7200

(ICS)

(TRANSISTORS)

TRANSISTOR(SI)

TRANSISTOR(Sl)

TRANSlSTOR(Sl)

(DIDES)

DIODE(SI)

DIODE(Sl)

S 1

-214-

---Kx-Fg00- --

.........................................

This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only. Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

Ref. No. Part No.

BAT10 PQPCR2032H09

CN 1 PQJP11A19Z

CN 2 PQJP11A19Z

CN3 PQJP07A19Z

CN 5 PQJP10G30Y

CN 6 PQJP8G30Y

CN 7 PQJP02G100Z

CN 8 PQJP2G30Z

CN 9 PQJP5G30Y

CN 10 PQJ P05G 100Z

CN11 PQJP09G100Z

L4 PQLQR 1ET

L6 PQLQR1ET

R79 PQLQR2BT

R80 PQLQR2BT

R81 PQLQR2BT

R82 PQLQR2BT

R83 PQLQR2BT

R84 PQLQR2BT

X1PQVCJ2400N5Z

X2 PQVCL3276N6Z

X 3 PQVCJ2400N5Z

RA1 EXRVSVl01JV

RA2 EXRVSV101JV

RA3 EXRVSVl01JV

RA4 EXRVSV101JV

LC1 EXCEMT222D

Part Name & Description Pcs Ref. No.

(BATTERY)

PRIMARY BA'I-FERY

(CONNECTORS)

CONNECTOR, 11 PIN

CONNECTOR, 7 PIN

CONNECTOR, 10 PIN

CONNECTOR, 8 PIN

CONNECTOR, 2 PIN

CONNECTOR, 5 PIN

CONNECTOR, 9 PIN

(COILS)

COIL

CRYSTAL OSCILLATIONS)

CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR

(COMPONENTS COMBINATIONS)

COMPONENTS COMBINATION

(CERAMIC FILTER)

CERAMIC FILTER

1 R3

Rll

1R12

1 R13

1R14

1R15

1R16

1R17

1R18

1 R19

1 R22

R28

R29

R30

R31

R32

R33

R34

R35

1 R36

1 R37

R38

1 R40

1 R41

1 R42

1 R43

1 R44

R45

R46

R47

R48

R49

R50

1 R51

1 R52

1 R53

R54

R55

R56

R57

R58

1 R59

1 R60

1 R61

R62

R63

R65

R66

R67

1 R70

R71

R72

R73

R74

R75

R76

R77

R78

Part No.

ERJ3GEYJ473

ERJ3GEYJ101

'PQ4R10XJ101

PQ4R10XJ101

ERJ3GEYJ101

PQ4R10XJ472

PQ4R10XJ101

PQ4R10XJ472

PQ4R10XJ224

PQ4R10XJ102

PQ4Rt0XJ102

PQ4R10XJ102

PQ4Rt0XJ103

PQ4R10XJ472

PQ4R10XJ151

POARt0XJ000

PQ4R10XJ393

PQ4R10XJ563

PQ4R10XJ562

PQ4R10XJ821

ERD25TJ222

PQ4R10XJ821

ERD25TJ222

PQ4R10XJ223

PQ4R10XJ563

PQ4R10XJ473

PQ4R10XJ101

PQ4R10XJ270

PQ4R10XJ105

PQ4R10XJ103

PQ4Rt0XJ103

PQ4R10XJ103

PQ4R10XJ000

ERD25TJ220

PQ4R10XJ000

PQ4R10XJ101

PQ4R10XJ000

PQ4R10XJ222

PCHR10XJ105

PQ4R10XJ000

Value

(RESISTORS)

47K

100

4.7K

100

4.7K

220K

10K

4.7K

150

JUMPER, 0_

39K

56K

5.6K

820

2.2K

820

2.2K

22K

56K

47K

100

10K

JUMPER, 0Q

JUMPER, 0_

JUMPER, OQ

100

JUMPER, 0_

2.2K

JUMPER, OQ

Pcs

-215-

i KX-F,oI

This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only. Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

Ref. No. Part No.

R85 PQ4R10XJ000

R86 PQ4R10XJ000

R87 PQ4 R10X J000

R88 PQ4R10XJ000

R90 PQ4R10XF1802

R91 PCHR 10X F8662

R92 PQ4R10XJ103

R93 ERJ6ENF4752

R94 PQ4 R10XJ473

R95 PQ4R10XJ332

R96 PQ4R 10X F8662

R97 PQ4R10XJ164

R98 PQ4R10XJ224

L7 PQ4R18XJ000

C 8 ECEAOJK221

C11 ECEA1CKS100

C13 ECUV1 H101JCV

C14 ECUV1 H101JCV

C15 ECUVl H101JCV

C16 ECUVlH101JCV

C17 ECUV1 H101JCV

C18 ECUV1 H101JCV

C19 ECUV I H101JCV

C31 PQCUV1H220JC

C32 PQCUV1H220JC

C33 ECEA1CK101

C34 ECEAOJK221

C35 PQCUV1 E104MD

C36 ECEA1 VKS4R7

C37 PQCUV1H 182KB

C38 PQCUV1H222KB

C39 PQCUV 1E104M D

C40 PQCUV1E104MD

C41 PQCUV1E104MD

C42 PQCUV1H150JC

C43 PQCUV1 H150JC

C44 PQCUV1E104MD

C45 PQCUV1E104MD

C46 PQCUV1E104MD

C47 PQCUV 1E 104MD

C48 PQCUV1 E104MD

C49 PQCUV1 E104MD

C51 PQCUV1 E104MD

C52 PQCUV 1E104MD

C53 PQCUV 1E104MD

C54 PQCUVlH050DC

C55 PQCUV1H050DC

C56 PQCUV1E104MD

C57 PQCUVt E104MD

C58 PQCUV1E104MD

C60 PQCUVlE 104MD

_.R1 PQCUVl H t03KB

Value

JUMPER, 0_

18K

86.6K

10K

47.5K

47K

3.3K

86.6K

16OK

220K

JUMPER, 0_

(CAPACITORS)

Pcs

Ref. No. Part No.

C64 PQCUV1E104MD

C67 PQCUVIE104MD

C68 PQCUV1E104MD

C69 PQCUV1E104MD

C70 PQCUVlE104MD

C71 PQCUV 1E104MD

C72 PQCUV1E104MD

C73 PQCUV1E104MD

C74 PQCUV 1EIO4MD

C75 PQCUV1H102J

C76 PQCUVlE224MD

377 PQCUV1E104MD

C78 PQCUV 1H331JC

C79 PQCUV1E104MD

38O

981

382

383

385

386

388

C89

C90

C91

C92

C93

PQCUV 1H 105JC

PQCUV 1H331JC

PQCUV 1E104MD

PQCUV 1H102J

PQCUV 1H105JC

ECUVlE105ZF

PQCUV1H120JC

PQCUV 1H 180JC

PQCUV1E104MD

PQCUV 1E104MD

Part Name & Description & Value

0.1

0.001

1.22

0.1

330 P

0.1

130P

0.1

0.001

O.O01

0.001

Pcs

220

;100P

100 P

100P

22P

100

S 1

C94

C95

PQCUV1E104MD 0.1

S 1

12P 1

18P 1

0.1 S 1

S 1

ANALOG BOARD PARTS

PCB2 PFWP3F900M ANALOG P.C.BOARD ASS'Y (RTL) z_ 1

220

0.!

4.7

0.0018

0.0022

0.1

15P

0,1

0.1

0.01

S 1

IC101 PQVINJM2903M

IC109 PQVIS79164FU

IC110 PQVITC4066BF

IC151 AN6116FAQ

IC201 PQVINJM4558M

IC202 PQVITC4066BF

IC241 PQVlMC34119M

Q101

Q102

Q103

Q106

2251

Q252

Q253

Q271

2SA1627

2SD1819A

2SC2235

PQVTDTC143E

2SD1921Q

2SD 1858R

PQVTDTC 143 E

(ICS)

(TRANSISTORS)

TRANSISTOR(SI)

TRANSISTOR(S0

S 1

-216-

KX-F900 1

This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only. Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

Ref. No

)101

)102

)151

)152

)201

)202

)271 I

)290

)291

_D101

_D102

_D103

IJ1

IJ2

;N152

;N153

;N241

;N251

;N271

;N272

;N273

;W271

;W272

;W273

;W274

103

104

.105

PC101

PC102

PC103

PC105

Pad No.

PQVDSIZB40F1

1SS119

1SSl19

1SS119

RLS71

1SSl19

MA4180

PQVDHZS2B1

MA7120

PFJJ1T01Z

PQJP2G30Z

PFJP18A02Z

PQJP02G100Z

!PQJP08BtlZ

PQJS11A10Z

PQJStlA10Z

PQJS07A10Z

PFSH1A02Z

PQSS2A27Z

PQLQR 1E32A07

PFLE003

PQVIPC814K

PQVITLP627

PQVIPC817CD

PQVIPC814K

Part Name & Description

(DIODES)

DIODE(SI)

(JACKS)

JACK, TELEPHONE LINE

(CONNECTORS)

CONNECTOR, 2PIN

CONNECTOR, 18PIN

CONNECTOR, 2PIN

CONNECTOR, 8PIN

CONNECTOR, 11PIN

CONNECTOR, 7PIN

(SWITCHES)

SWITCH, SENSOR

SWITCH, DIALING MODE

(COILS)

COIL

(PHOTO COUPLERS)

PHOTO ELECTRIC TRANSDUCER zt

PHOTO ELECTRIC TRANSDUCER Z_

PHOTO ELECTRIC TRANSDUCER

Pcs

Ref. No.

;A101

;A102

101

"102

.106

_OS101

;1L101

tAR1

:1102

:1103

:1104

:1106

:1107

:1109

:1111

:1112

;1113

;1114

;1115

;1116

;1117

;1118

{120

{130

{131

{132

1133

{134

{135

{136

{138

{139

1140

1141

{142

;1143

:_144

:_145

R146

R147

R148

R149

R150

R158

R159

Part No.

PQVDDSS301L

PFVDRA102M

PQLT8E7A

PQLT8E6A

EXCELDR35

PQRPBC120N

PQSL119Z

PQVDVR61B

PQ4R18XJ000

ERDS1TJ330

ERDS1TJ473

ERDS2TJ152

ERDS1TJ473

PQ4R10XJ104

PQ4R10XJ472

PQ4R10XJ393

PQ4R10XJ103

PQ4R10XJ682

PQ4R10XJ822

ERDS2TJ5R6

PQ4R10XJ123

PQ4R10XJ562

PQ4R10XJ391

ERJ3GEYJ332

ERJ3GEYJ 102

ERJ3GEYJ223

ERJ3GEYJ104

ERJ3GEYJ512

ERJ3GEYJ563

ERJ3GEYJ102

ERJ3GEYJ333

PQ4R10XJ220

ERJ3GEYJ681

ERJ3GEYJ123

ERJ3GEYJ275

ER33GE'YJ223

ERJ3GEYJ273

ERJ3GEYJ 114

ERJ3GEYJ104

ERJ3GEYJ513

ERJ3GEYJ224

ERJ3GEYJ222

Part Name & Description & Value

VARISTORS)

VARISTOR

(TRANSFORMERS)

TRANSFORMER

(OTHERS)

COMPONENTS COMBINATION

THERMISTOR

RELAY

VARISTOR s

(RESISTORS)

JUMPER, 0_

47K

1.5K

47K

100K

4.7K

39K

10K

_.8K

!e.2K

5.6

12K

5.6K

ago

3.3K

22K

100K

5.1K

56K

33K

68O

12K

2.7M

22K

27K

110K

100K

_)20K

2.2K

Pcs

-217-

KX-F900

This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only. Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

1. N_

'51

_52

_54

t55

-)56

._57

_)71

272

273

274

Pa_ No.

E RJ3GEYJ !03

E RJ3GEYJ103

ERJ3GEYJ104

E RJ3GEYJ103

ERJ3GEYJ683

E RJ3GEYJ103

E RJ3GEYJ683

ERJ3GEYJ104

E RJ3GEYJ123

ERJ3GEYOR00

ERJ3GEYJ334

ERJ3GEYJ223

ERJ3GEYJ103

ERJ3GEYJ274

ERJ3GEYJ682

ERJ3GEYJ433

ERJ3GEYJ153

ERJ3GEYJ473

ERJ3GEYJ183

ERJ3GEYJ184

E RJ3GEYJ103

ERJ3GEYJ124

ERJ3GEYJ223

ERJ3GEYJ155

PQ4R10XJ105

ERDS2TJ102

PQ4R18XJ101

ERJ3GEYJ102

ERJ3GEYJ563

ERJ3GEYJ223

ERJ3GEYJ563

ERJ3GEYJ822

ERJ3GEYJ184

ERJ3GEYJ682

PQ4 R10XJ 184

ERJ3GEYJ224

ERJ3GEYJ393

ERJ3GEYJ224

PQ4R10XJ104

PQ4R10XJ224

ERJ3GEYJ222

ERJ3GEYJ332

ERJ3GEYOR00

PQ4R10XJ 104

ERJ3GEYJ682

ERJ3GEYJ472

PQ4R10XJ4R7

ERJ3GEYJ103

ERJ3GEYJ102

ERJ3GEYJ153

ERJ3GEYJ123

PQ4R10XJ221

ERDS1TJ122

PQ4R10XJ103

PQ4R10XJ563

PQ4R10XJ123

PQ4R10XJ222

ERJ3GEYJ 102

ERJ3GEYJ 101

ERJ3GEYJ102

IPQ4R10XJ101

Value

JUMPER, 0(1

10K

100K

10K

68K

10K

68K

100K

12K

JUMPER, 0Q

330K

22K

10K

270K

6.8K

43K

15K

47K

18K

180K

10K

120K

22K

1.5M

100

!56K

22K

56K

&2K

180K

&8K

180K

220K

39K

220K

100K

220K

2.2K

3.3K

JUMPER, 0_

100K

6.8K

4.7K

4.7

10K

15K

12K

220

1.2K

10K

56K

12K

2.2K

100

Pcs

1 :

L 1

;tef. No. i

275 '

276

277

278 I

279

28O

281

282

284

29O

291

292

293

294

295

296

297

108

104

105

250

252

270

271

272

273

274

275

276

;193

;101

;102

;103

;104

;105

;106

)107

;108

3109

3110

3111

3112

C130

C131

C132

C133

C134

C135

Pa_ No.

PQ4R10XJ!02

ERJ3GEYJ101

PQ4Rt0XJ472

PQ4R10XJ101

ERJ3GEYJ101

ERJ3GEYJ333

ERJ3GEYJ 182

ERJ3GEYJ473

PQ4R 10XJ 000

ERJ3GEYJ473

ERJ3GEYJ563

ERJ3GEYJ152

iERJ3GEYJ473

IERJ3GEYJ104

ERJ3GEYJI02

ERJ3GEYJI03

ERDS2TJ681

ERJ3GEYOR00

PQ4R10XJ000

PCHR10XJ000

ERJ3GEYOR00

E RJ3GEYOR00

ERJ3GEYOR00

ECKD2H681KB

ECQE2E224JZ

ECEA1HN3R3S

ECQE2E104KZ

PQCUV1H103KB

ECEA1CKS221

ECEA1CKS100

ECEA1HKS4R7

ECEAICKS100

PQCUV1E333MD

PQCUV1H 105JC

ECUV1C683KBV

ECEA1HKS010

PQCUVlC224ZF

ECUV1H561JCV

ECEA1CKS470

ECEA1HKS4R7

100

4.7K

100

33K

1.8K

47K

JUMPER, 0_

47K

56K

1.5K

47K

100K

10K

680

JUMPER, O_

JUMPER, OQ

JUMPER, O_

JUMPER, 0_

!JUMPER, 0_

IJUMPER, 0Q

JUMPER, 0_

JUMPER, 0Q

JUMPER, 0_

JUMPER, 0O

JUMPER, 0_

Value

(CAPACITORS)

P°sI

680P

0.22

3.3

0.1

0.01

220

4.7

0.033

0.068

1.22

;60P

4.7

S I

s I

S I

s, I

sl 1

-218-

This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only. Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

KX-F900

_ef. No.

:136

',137

;138

',139

;140

;141

:142

;143

;144

;145

;146

;155

;156

;157

;158

;159

;161

;162

;166

,_171

_172

_173

_.174

_176

_.177

_178

_.179

;180

;181

;182

;183

.3184

.3186

.3187

.3188

;189

.3201

.3202

.3203

.3204

.3205

.3206

.3207

-3208

.3209

.3210

.3211

.3212

.3213

.3214

.3217

.3218

C241

C242

C243

C244

C245

C251

C252

C253

C254

C255

C256

Pan No.

ECEAOJK221

ECEA1HKS4R7

ECUV1C473KBV

ECUV1H223KBV

ECEAOJSJ331

PQCUV1H222KB

PQCUVlC224ZF

ECUV1C473KBV

ECEA1HKS010

ECEA1HKS2R2

PQCUV1H333JC

ECUV1H221JCV

ECEAOJKS101

ECUV1H332KBV

ECUV1C683KBV

ECUVlCl04KBV

PQCUV1H105JC

PQCUV 1H 10550

PQCUV 1H 105JC

PQCUV1H105JC

ECEAOJKS101

ECUVIC104KBV

ERJ3GEYOR00

ECUV1C473KBV

ECUV1H101JCV

ECEAOJKSl01

ECUV1C104KBV

ECUV1H331JCV

PQCUV1E104MD

ECUV1H221JCV

ECUV1H682KBV

ECUVlCl04KBV

ECUV1H332KBV

ECUVlCl04KBV

ECUV1H332KBV

PQCUV1 H102J

ECEA1 HKS4R7

PQCUV1 E104MD

ECUV1H680JCV

PQCUV1 E104MD

PQCUV1H101JC

PQCUV1 E104MD

ECUV1H101JCV

ECUV1H 103KBV

ECEA1HKS100

ECEA1CKS100

ECEA1HKS100

ECUV1C104KBV

ECUVlCl04KBV

PQCUV1C224ZF

ECEAOJKS101

ECUV1H 102KBV

PQCUV 1H 105JC

PQCUV1H 105JC

PQCUVlE273MD

PQCUV1H 104ZF

ECEA1HU330

ECEA 1HU330

PQCUV1E104MD

ECEA1EU101

IPQCUV1H 104ZF

Value

220

4.7

0.047

0.022

330

0.0022

0.22

0.047

2.2

0.033

220P

100

0.0033

0.068

0.1

100

0.1

JUMPER, 0_

0.047

100P

100

0.1

330P

0.1

220P

0.0068

0.1

0.0033

3.1

3.0033

0.0033

0.001

4.7

C).1

B8P

0.1

100P

0.1

100P

0.01

0.1

0.22

100

3.001

1.027

).1

0.1

100

).1

PCS

S 1

Ref. No.

;257

:265

;271

;272

;273

;274

;276

;277

;278

;279

;290

;291

Part No. Value

ECEA1HU330 33

ECUVIHIO4ZFV

ECUV1H103KBV

PQCUV1H103KB

ECUV1H103KBV

ECUV1H104ZFV

PQCUV1C334ZF

ECUV1H330JCV

ECUVIC104KBV

ECUV1H103KBV

0.1

0.01

0.1

0.33

33P

0.1

0.01

Pcs

-219-

I X--F90O]

This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only. Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

Ref. No. I Part No.

PFLP1058M

MN53007QAF

1SS131

PQVDR325CA47

PQVDSLR325MC

PQSH1A105Z

F'QSH 1A 105Z

PQSH1A105Z

PQSH 1A 105Z

PQSH 1A105Z

PQSH1A105Z

PQSH 1A105Z

PQSH1A105Z

PQSH 1A105Z

PQS H1A 105Z

PQSH 1A105Z

PQSH1A105Z

PQSH 1A105Z

PQSH1A105Z

PQSH1 A105Z

pQJP10G43Y

pQJS10X59Z

IPart Name & Description I Pcs

OPERATION BOARD PARTS

)PERATION P.C.BOARD ASS'Y (RTL)

Ic)

(DIODES)

DIODE(SI)

LED

SWITCHES)

SWITCH, VOLUME S

SWITCH, ONE-TOUCH S

SWITCH, STOP S

SWITCH, ONE-TOUCH S

SWITCH, START/COPYtSET S

SWITCH, LOWER S

SWITCH, ONE-TOUCH S

SWITCH, VOLUME S

SWITCH, DIAL "3" S

SWITCH, DIAL "2" S

SWITCH, DIAL "1" S

SWITCH, SP-PHONE S

SWITCH, MUTE S

SWITCH, REDIAL/PAUSE S

SWITCH, FLASH S

SWITCH, HELP S

SWITCH, DIAL "6" S

SWITCH, DIAL "5" S

SWITCH, DIAL "4" S

SWITCH, DIRECTORY S

SWITCH, DIAL "9" S

SWITCH, DIAL "8" S

SWITCH, DIAL "7" S

SWITCH, AUTO RECEIVE S

SWITCH, DIAL "#"' S

SWITCH, DIAL "0" S

SWITCH, DIAL" _ " S

SWITCH, MEMU S

SWITCH, RESOLUTION S

SWITCH, LOCATOR/INTERCOM S

(CONNECTORS)

CONNECTOR, 10 PIN

ef. No.

301

302

_,07

_08

_09

_,11

312

320

322

323

328

329

330

331

332

333

334

335

336

337

338

339

34O

341

35O

351

352

353

354

392

;301

;302

;305

;307

3308

3309

3310

3314

C316

C318

C319

Part No.

CNA1006N

;NA1006N

_Q4R10XJ181

PQ4R10XJ181

PQ4R10XJ680

PQ4R10XJ222

PQ4R10XJ471

PQ4R10XJ102

PQ4R10XJ472

PQ4R10XJ331

PQ4R10XJ563

PQ4R10XJ181

PQ4R10XJ!81

PQ4R10XJ181

PQ4R10XJ103

PQ4R10XJ471

PQ4R10XJ000

PQCUV1 E104MD

ECEA1AKS101

PQCUV1H 122KB

PQCUk/1 _4331JC

PQCUV 1H331JC

PQCUV1H331JC

PQCUV1E104MD

PQCUVlE104MD

PQCUV 1E104MD

Part Name & Description & Value

(PHOTO COPLERS)

PHOTO ELECTRIC TRANSDUCER

(RESISTORS)

180

2.2K

470

4.7K

330

56K

180

10K

470

JUMPER, 0£

(CAPACITORS)

0.1

100

).0012

33oP

330P

30P

_30P

1.1

0.1

'cS

-220-

This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only.

Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

Re,NoIPa NoI Pa Name,Oesori on,VaueIPcs

CCD BOARD PARTS

I PFWP2F780M

2SB1218A

2SD1819A

PFJS08R26Z

EVNDXAA03B23

PQHR5135Z

PQ4R10XJ202

IPQ4R 10XJ 100

IPQ4R 10XJ242

IPQ4R10XJ272

IPQ4R 10XJ242

IPQ4R 10XJ272

IPQ4R 10XJ47t

iPQAR10XJ47t

IPQ4R 10XJ681

IPQ4Rt0XJ101

iPQ4RIOXJt01

I PQ4R 10XJ000

1801 PQ4 R18X J000

1802 PQ4R 10X J000

1803 PQ4R 10X J000

.3801 PQCUV1E104MD

.3803 ECEA1CKS101

3804 PQCUV1E104MD

CCD P.C.BOARD ASS'Y (RTL)

(TRANSISTORS)

TRANSISTOR(SI)

(CONNECTOR)

CONNECTOR, 8 PIN

(OTHERS)

VARIABLE RESISTOR

SPACER

(RESISTORS)

2.4K

2.7K

2.4K

2.7K

470

680

100

JUMPER, 0_

(CAPACITORS)

0.1

100

0.1

S 1

I I

Ref. No. I Part No. ]Part Name & Description

I I

SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY BOARD PARTS

_CB5

_101

C201

3202

_101

;)201

)101

)102

)103

)104

)105

)106

)201

)202

)203

)204

)205

;N31

;N301 I

;N302 I

.101

.102

-201

_NR101

ZNR102

ZNR103

PFLP1038MM1

PFVlFA5317P

AN1431T

PFVINJ2360AD

PQVTFS10KM10

2SC4604

PQVDD2SBA60

PQVDERA1802

PFVDAG01A

MA165

MA4220

MA165

MA6D49

MA2300

PQVDERA81004

MA4075

MA165

PQJP2D98Z

PQJP6G100Z

PQJS08A36Z

ELF18D290

PQLQXL471K

ERZV10DK471U

ERZV10DK182U

ERZV10DK751U

POWER SUPPLY P.C.BOARD

(ICS)

(TRANSISTORS)

TRANSISTOR(SI)

(DIODES)

DIODE(SI)

(CONNECTORS)

CONNECTOR, 2PtN

CONNECTOR, 6PtN

CONNECTOR, 8PIN

(COILS)

COIL

(VARISTORS)

VARISTOR

KX-F900

I Pcs

,,'h 1

ASS'Y (RTL)

S 1

z_S 1

•_S 1

,,k_ 1

,_S 1

,._S 1

-221 -

I.....Kx. ,oo....1

This replacement parts list is for U.S,A. version only. Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

Ref. No.

L103

I..203

PC101

PC 102

F101

TI01

THI01

VR201

RL201

RIO1

R102

R103

R104

R105

R106

R107

R108

R109

Rl10

R111

Rl12

Rl13

Rl14

R121

R122

R124

R125

R126

R127

R20t

R202

R204

R205

R221

R222

R223

R224

R225

R227

_228

J12

J13

Pan No.

EXCELDR35

ON3131S

PQBA1C50NBKL

PFLTR297101

PFRTM8R207C

EVNDJAA03B53

PQSLG5P1

'ERDSIFJt05

E RDS2TJ393

ERDS2TJ393

ERG1SJU100

ERX2SJR22

ERDS2TJ0t0

ERDS2TJ220

ERDS2FJ150

ERDS2TJ273

ERG1SJ104

ERDS2TJ273

ERDS2TJ220

PQ4R10XJ103

PQ4R10XJ471

PQ4R10XJ181

PQ4R10XJ101

PQ4R10XJ562

PQ4R10XJ222

ERG1SJR33

ERDS2TJ121

ERDS2TJ563

ERDS2TJ103

PQ4R10XJ222

PQ4R10XJ101

PQ4R10XJ273

PQ4R10XJ332

PQ4R10XJ392

PQ4R10XJ122

PQ4R18XJ000

PQ4R10XJ000

Part Name & Description & Value

(COMPONENTS COMBINATIONS)

COMPONENTS COMBINATION

COMPONENTS COMBINATION S

(PHOTO COUPLERS)

,PHOTO ELECTRIC TRANSDUCER z_

PHOTO ELECTRIC TRANSDUCER ,_

Pcs Ref. No.

C101

C102

C103

C104

C105

C106

C107

C108

C109

Pa_ No.

ECQU2A104MV

ECKDRS102MB

ECKDKC472KB

EETLD2D151

ECKD3A221 KBP

ECKD3A102KBP

ECA1 VHG330

Part Name & Description & Value

(CAPACITORS)

0.1

0.001

0.0047

150

220P

0.001

(OTHERS)

FUSE z_

TRANSFORMER z_

THERMISTOR S

VARIABLE RESISTOR S

RELAY S

(RESISTORS)

39K

0.22

'27K

tOOK

27K

t0K

470

180

100

5.6K

2.2K

,0.33

120

56K

10K

2.2K

100

27K

3.3K

3.9K

1.2K

JUMPER, 0Q

JUMPER, 0_

C121

C122

C123

C124

C201

1 C202

tC204

1 C221

1 C223

1 PCB6

1 IC501

1 IC502

1 C503

IIC504

1C}502

1Q503

Q504

1 Q505

1 Q506

1 Q507

1Q50B

1 Q509

1Q510

1 C}511

Q512

ECUV1H221KBM 220P

ECUV1C224KBX 0.22

ECUV1H561KBM 560P

'ECUV1H473KBW 0.047

EEUFA1V103 0.001

ECKD3A102KBP 0.001

PQCEA 10B1000 1000

ECUV1HIO4KBW 0.1

ECUV1H271KBM 270P

z_ 1

z_, 1

,_ 1

CORDLESS BASE BOARD PARTS

PFLPt056M 1

PFVI0008GE12

AN6165SB

PQVITC4069UBF

PQVINJ2360D

CORDLESS BASE P.C.BOARD

ASS'Y (RTL

(ICS)

(TRANSISTORS)

TRANSISTOR(SI)

,TRANSISTOR(SI)

TRANSISTOR(SI)

TRANSlSTOR(SI)

TRANSISTOR(Sl)

TRANSISTOR(SI)

Pcs

2SD601R

2SB970A

PQVTDTC144E

2SB970A

_SB1416

2SB1322

2SK543

PQVTDTC144E

- 222-

IThis replacement

_ef. No. I Part No.

501 _PQVDSBT03Q

503 I1SS131

504 IMA110

505 I1SS131

506 IMA110

507 IMA110

508 IMA110

509 IPQVDS5688G

510 IPQVDAK04A

511 IMA4075

513 I PQVDDSS301L

N50i / PFJP18A02Z

N502 I

N503 I

G ]

501

502

506

507

508

517

519 !

520

'CB6-1

i601

'R501

'R502

'.501

_501

_502

_503

_504

_505

R506

R510

R511

R512

R518

PQJP 12B44Z

PQJP8G30Y

PQJP18Z

PQLQR1KT

PQLQZM2R2K

PQLQXH152J

PQLQRtKT

PQLP10179M

PQHR10484Z

EVNDXAA03B24

EVNDXAA03B54

PQVBT3.99G 1

PQ4R10XJ102

PQ4R10XJ000

PQ4R10XJ102

PQ4R10XJ104

PQ4R10XJ105

PQ4R10XJ104

PQ4R10XJ000

I KX-F900- ............]

parts list is for U.S.A. version only. Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

Part Name & Description & Value

(DIODES)

DIODE(SI)

DIODE(S0

DIODE(SI)

DIODE(S0

VARISTOR

(CONNECTORS)

CONNECTOR, 18 PIN

CONNECTOR, 12 PIN

CONNECTOR, 8 PIN

CONNECTOR LEAD

(COl LS)

COIL

(OTHERS)

RF UNIT P.C.BOARD

HOLDER tor RF UNIT

VARIABLE RESISTOR

;ERAMIC FILTER

(RESISTORS)

JUMPER, 0Q

1O0K

10OK

JUMPER, 0_

Pcs

:{ef. No.

519

52O

521

522

523

524

525

526

530

534

535

539

540

:541

;542

;543

;544

1545

;546

',548

;549

',550

1553

:554

;557

;558

;561

;562

;563

L564

_565

t567

t568

t569

_570

T571

T572

_573

1574

T575

_576

1577

1578

1579

_580

_581

;t582

:1583

:1584

:1585

_587

_588

:_589

_590

R591

R592

R593

R594

R595

R596

R598

R599

Part No. Value

PQ4R10XJ000 JUMPER, 0_

PQ4R 10X J000

PQ4R 10XJ000

PQ4R 10XJ224

PQ4R 10X J000

PQ4R10XJ000

ERDStTJ560

ERDS1TJ470

PQ4R10XJ104

PQ4 R18XJ332

PQ4R10XJ562

PQ4R10XJ103

ERDS2TJ221

ERDS1TJ101

ERDS1TJ560

PQ4R10XJ104

PQ4R10XJ103

PQ4R10XJ562

PQ4R10XJ103

PQ4R10XJ000

PQ4Rt0XJ000

PQ4R10XJO00

PQ4R10XJ154

PQ4R10XJ105

PQ4R10XJ154

PQ4R10XJ333

PQ4R10XJ563

PQ4R10XJ123

PQ4R10XJ223

PQ4R10XJ000

PQ4R10XJ333

PQ4R10XJ000

PQ4R10XJ822

PQ4R10XJ153

PQ4R10XJ123

PQ4R10XJ563

PQ4R10XJ472

PQ4R10XJ682

PQ4R10XJ102

PQ4R10XJ154

ERX2SJR82

ERDS2TJ101

ERDStTJ102

EROS2TKF8661

EROS2TKF1001

PQ4R10XJ223

PQ4R10XJ103

PQ4R10XJ332

PQ4R10XJ823

PQ4R10XJ471

PQ4R10XJ123

PQ4R10XJ562

JUMPER, O_

JUMPER, 0_

220K

JUMPER, 0_

JUMPER, OQ

100K

3.3K

5.6K

10K

220

100

100K

10K

5.6K

10K

JUMPER, 0_

JUMPER, 0Q

JUMPER, 0_

150K

33K

56K

12K

22K

JUMPER, 0_

33K

JUMPER, 0_

8.2K

15K

12K

56K

4.7K

6.8K

150K

0.82

100

8.66K

22K

1OK

3.3K

82K

470

12K

5.6K

PCS

1 I

-223-

iKx--Fgoo....j

This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only. Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

Ref. No.

_600

_601

9602

9603

R604

R605

R606

R607

R608

R609

R610

R611

R612

R613

R614

R615

R616

R617

R618

R619

R620

R621

R622

[-505

C501

C502

C503

C504

3507

3508

C509

C510

C511

C512

C513

C5!4

C515

C516

C518

C520

C522

C523

C524

3525

C526

C527

C528

C529

C530

C531

C532

C533

C534

Pa_ No.

PQ4R10XJ563

PQ4R10XJ000

PCHR10XJ473

PQ4R10XJ332

PO4R10XJ000

PQ4R10XJ123

PQ4R18XJ472

PQ4R10XJ393

PQ4R10XJ683

PQ4R10XJ394

PQ4R10XJ564

PQ4R10XJ183

PQ4R10XJ104

PQ4R10XJ124

PQ4R10XJ000

PQ4R10XJ474

PQ4R10XJ683

PQ4R10XJ474

PQ4R10XJ102

PQ4R10XJ103

PQ4R10XJ000

PQ4R10XJ563

PQ4R10XJO00

PQCUV1H 103KB

PQCU Vl E 104MD

PQCUVl E104MD

PQCUV 1H 105JC

IECEA1EU470

ECEA 1EU470

ECEAOJU 102

PQCUV1E104MD

PQCUV1H 103KB

PQCUV1H103KB

PQCUV1H 152KB

ECEA1HU220

PQCUV 1H105JC

ECEA1HU4R7

ECEA1HU100

PQCUV 1H272KB

ECEA1EU101

PQCUV1H151JC

PQCUV1H 123MD

PQCUV1H392KB

ECEA1HU100

ECEA1HU4R7

PQCUV1H391JC

PQCUV1H123MD

PQ4R10XJ000

PN_I IV1 HR??KB

56K

JUMPER, 0_

47K

3.3K

JUMPER, 0Q

12K

4.7K

39K

68K

390K

560K

18K

100 K

120K

JUMPER, 0_

470K

68K

470K

Value Pcs ReL No.

10K

JUMPER, 0_

56K

JUMPER, 0_

(CAPACITORS)

0.01

0.1

1000

0.1

0.01

D.01

0.01

L01

0.01

).0015

4.7

3.0027

100

150P

0.012

0.0039

4.7

390P

0 012

0.0082

S 1

C536

C537

C538

C539

C540

iC541

3542

0545

0546

.3547

C548

C549

C550

C551

C552

C553

C554

C555

C556

C558

C559

C560

C561

C564

C568

0569

C570

C571

C572

C573

C574

PCB6-1

IC301

IC302

Q301

Q302

Q303

Q304

Q305

Q308

Q309

Q310

Part No.

PQCUVt E104MD

PQCUV 1H 105JC

ECEA1CK101

PQCUVt C474ZF

PQCUV1E 104MD

PQCUV1 E473MD

ECEA1HU220

PQCUV1 E333MD

ECQV1H684JM

PQCUV1C224ZF

PQCUV1E104MD

PQCUV 1H221JC

PQCUV1 E473MD

PQCUV 1H221JC

PQCUV 1H 105JC

ECEA1HU100

ECEA1HU010

PQCUVlC683MD

ECEA1VGE101

ECCD1H151JC

ECEA1CKS221

PQ4R18XJ000

PQCUV1H101JC

PQCUV1H105JC

PQCUV1EIO4MD

PQCUV1E104MD

PQCUV1 E104MD

PQCUV1 H222KB

PQCUV1H331JC

PQLP10179M

PQVlM64084AG

PQVIDBL5018V

2SC4571R77

2SC4226R24

2SC4116

'2SD601A

PQVTD123J106

Part Name &Description & Value

0.1

100

0.47

0.1

0.047

0.033

0.68

0.22

0.1

220P

0.047

220P

0.068

100

150 P

220

lOOP

0.1

0.0022

330P

RF UNIT PARTS

RF UNIT P.C.BOARD ASS'Y (RTL)

Ics)

(TRANSISTORS)

TRANSISTOR(SI)

Pcs

S 1

-224-

This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only.

Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

KX-F900 ]

el. No, I Part No.

301 I PQV DRB751 N4

302 IPQVDRB751 H4

303 IMA110

304 IMAl10

305 IMA2S111

306 IMA110

310 IMA8047

391 IMAl10

W301 "PQJS12A99Z

.301

.302

_303

_304

Y01

|02

303

304

322

389

x vco

_(vco

PQVSM903Cl 0L

PQVS705CE927

PQVFSFE107MJ

PQVFCFH450B1

PQLQR1RM601

PQLQR1 RM601

MQLRE10NJF

PQLQR2N3 R3KT

PQLQR1 RM601

650

651

305

'C301

1R301

(301

PQLQR1RM601

PQV030Z

PQV031Z

PQMC 10214Z

PQMC 10215Z

PQLI2B201

F_CRLA010A53R

EVN5ESX50B54

PQVCJ 1025NOZ

PartName & Description

(DIODES)

DIODE(SI)

DIODE(Sl)

DIODE(SI)

(CONNECTOR)

CONNECTOR, 12PIN

(CERAMIC FILTERS)

CERAMIC FILTER

(COILS)

COIL

(CRYSTALS)

CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR

(OTHERS)

MAGNETIC SHIELD COVER

I.F. TRANSFORMER

TRIMMER CAPACITOR

/ARIABLE RESISTOR

ARIABLE CAPACITOR

_CS

',ef. No. I Part No.

301 IERJ3GEYJ333

302 IERJ3GEYJ470

303 IERJ3GEYJ101

_04 IERJ3GEYJ333

305 IERJ3GEYJ821

306 IERJ3GEYJ681

307 IERJ3GEYJ223

308 IERJ3GEYJ153

309 I ERJ3GEYJ153

310 IERJ3GEYJ222

_,11 IERJ3GEYJ223

312 I ERJ3GEYJ223

313 I ERJ3GEYJ470

314 I ERJ3GEYJ470

315 I ERJ3GEYJ681

316 I ERJ3GEYJ153

Value

(RESISTORS)

317 IERJ3GEYJt 53

318 ERJ3GEYJ223

319 ERJ3GEYJ474

320 ERJ3GEYJ470

321 ERJ3GEYJ391

323 ERJ3GEYJ474

324 ERJ3GEYJ102

325 ERJ3GEYJ104

327 ERJ3GEYJ824

328 ERJ3GEYJ472

329 ERJ3GEYJ334

330 E RJ3G EYJ 154

331 :ERJ3GEYJ821

332 ERJ3GEYJ102

334 ERJ3GEYJ222

335 ERJ3GEYJ222

336 ERJ3G EYJ 103

337 ERJ3GEYJ220

338 ERJ3GEYJ222

339 ERJ3GEYJ222

340 ERJ3GEYJ222

342 ERJ3GEYJ101

350 E RJ3G EYJ821

353 ERJ3GEYJ222

356 ERJ3GEYJ000

357 ERJ3GEYJ392

358 ERJ3GEYJ222

359 ERJ3GEYJ680

360 ECUVlH040CCV

361 ERJ3GEYJ000

362 ERJ3GEYJ680

306 ERJ3GEYJ000

317 ERJ3GEYJ120

318 ERJ3GEYJ220

',630 ERJ3GEYJ470

;632 ERJ3GEYJ000

;312 ERJ3GEYJ470

.3394 ERJ3GEYJOO0

33K

100

33K

820

680

22K

15K

2.2K

22K

58O

15K

22K

470K

390

470K

100K

820K

4.7K

330K

150K

820

2.2K

10K

2.2K

100

820

2.2K

JUMPER, 0_

3.9K

2.2K

JUMPER, 0Q

JUMPER, 0_

JUMPER, 0Q

JUMPER, 0o

Pcs

-225-

I KX-F900 I

..........................................................

This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only, Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

Ref. No. Part No.

C302

C303

C304

C305

C306

C308

C309

C310

C311

C313

C314

C315

C317

C318

C319

C320

C321

,_322

C323

C324

C325

C327

C328

C329

C330

C331

C333

C334

C336

C337

C338

C339

C340

C341

C342

C343

C345

C346

C348

,C349

C350

C351

C352

C354

C376

C380

C381

C385

C386

C387

C388

C389

C390

C392

C393

C395

C398

C399

C600

C601

_02

ECUV 1HOR5CCV

ECUV 1H050CCV

ECUV 1H 102KBV

ECUV 1H020CCV

ECUV 1H102KBV

ECUV 1H030CCV

ECUVlH030CCV

ECEA1CKS470

ECUVlH102KBV

PQCUVlC224ZF

ECUV1H682KBV

ECUV1H332KBV

ECUV1H820JCV

ECUV1H430JCV

ECUVlH080DCV

ECUV1H103KBV

ECUV1H020CCV

ECUV1H030CCV

ECUV1H102KBV

ECUVlH102KBV

ECUV1H060DCV

ECUV1H040CCV

ECUV1H 103KBV

ECEA1CKS470

ECUV1H223KBV

PQCUVlC224ZF

ECUV1H680JCV

ECUVlH103KBV

ECUV1H220JCV

PQCUV1C224ZF

ECUVlH101JCV

ECUV1H333KDV

ECUV1H102KBV

ECUV1H472KBV

ECUV1H020CCV

ECUV1H103KBV

PQCUV1H105JC

ECUV1H103KBV

ECUV1H060DCV

ECUV1H102KBV

ECSTOJX336

ECUV1H1R5CCV

ECUV1H101JCV

ECUV1H102KBV

ECUV1H101JCV

ECUV1H020CCV

ECUV1H102KBV

ECUVlH103KBV

ECEAlCKS100

ECUV1H101JCV

ECUV1A105ZFV

ECUV1H101JCV

I::PI t\l II-1IN 1 .I(_,V

Value

(CAPACITORS)

0.5

0.001

0,001

0.22

0.0068

0.0033

82P

43P

0.01

0.001

:4P

0.01

0.022

0.22

68P

0.01

22P

0.22

100P

0.033

0.001

0.0047

0.01

3.001

33O

100P

0.001

100P

0,001

0.01

100P

[INNP

Pcs

S 1

Ref. No,

C603

;604

C605

C606

C607

C608

C610

C611

C612

C613

C615

C616

C617

C618

C620

C621

C622

C623

C624

C625

Pa_ No.

ECUV1H101JCV

ECUV1 H101JCV

ECUV1H101JCV

ECUV1 H101JCV

ECUVlH101JCV

ECUVl H101JCV

ECUV1H101JCV

ECUV1H 101JCV

ECUV1 H101JCV

Part Name & Description & Value Pcs

100P

t00P

100P

PORTABLE HANDSET BOARD PARTS

PCB7 PQWP1TC910BR PORTABLE HANDSET P.C.BOARr 1

ASS'Y (RTL)

IC201 MN151233KZAB IC

IC202 AN6165SB IC

IC203 AN6183SE1 IC

IC204 PQVIXCC3501P IC

IC205 PQVIXC3002PR IC

IC206 PQVIXCC3202P IC

IC207 PQVIXC3002PR IC

IC208 PQVINJM2113V IC

PQVIM64084AG

PQVIDBL5018V

2SD1819A

PQVTDTB123E

2SD1819A

PQVTDTA 143EU

PQVTDTB123E

2SD1819A

PQVTDTC143E

PQVTD 123T 146

PQVTD123J 106

2SD1819A

PQVTDTC144TU

2SC4571R77

2SC4226R24

2SC4227R34

2SC4116

(ics)

(TRANSISTORS)

TRANSISTOR(SI)

TRANSISTOR(S0

TRANSISTOR(SI)

TRANSlSTOR(SI)

TRANSISTOR(SI)

TRANSISTOR(St)

TRANStSTOR(SI)

TRANSISTOR(SI)

IC401

IC402

Q201

Q202

Q203

Q204

Q205

Q206

Q208

Q209

Q212

Q213

Q214

3215

3217

Q401

Q402

Q403

Q404

Q405

S 1

-226-

Ref. No. Part No.

IKX-F900

replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only. Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

POS

D201 MA110

D202 PQVDRB751H4

D206 PQVDPY 1112H

D207 PQVDPY | 112H

D208 PQVDPY1112H

D209 PQVDPY1112H

D210 PQVDPY 1112H

D212 PQVDBR1112H

D213 MAll0

D214 MA3062

D215 MA110

D217 MA110

D401 PQVDRB751H4

D402 PQVDRB751 H4

D403 MA110

DA MA110

DF MA110

L201 PQLQR3ER 10K

L202 PQLQR3ER10K

I..203 PQLQR3ER10K

L400 PQLQR1RM601

L401 PQLQR1RM601

L402 PQLQR1RM601

L404 PQLQR2N3R3KT

L406 MQLRE2N7DF

L413 PQLQR1RM601

L414 PQLQR1RM601

L415 PQLQR1RM601

L416 PQLQR1RM601

L417 PQLQR1RM601

L418 PQLQR 1RM601

L419 MQLRE6N8JF

L420 MQLRE10NJF

L421 MQLRE15NJF

L422 MQLRE6N8JF

J206 PQLQR2TR10K

FL401 PQVSM927C11L

FL402 PQVS705CF903

FL403 PQVFSFE107MJ

FL404 PQVFCFH450B1

VR201 EVN5ESX50B15

VR202 EVN5ESX50B54

VR203 EVM1YSX50B52

VR401 EVN5ESX50B54

Part Name & Description

(DIODES)

DIODE(SI)

DIODE(St)

DIODE(SI)

Pcs Ref. No.

(COILS)

COIL

(CERAMIC FILTERS)

CERAMIC FILTER

(VARIABLE RESISTORS)

VARIABLE RESISTOR

VAR ABLE RESISTOR

VARIABLE RESISTOR

RXVCO

TXVCO

X201

X202

E901

E902

E903

E904

L405

VC401

X401

R201

Pa_ No.

PQV032Z

PQV033Z

PQVBTCC3.99M

PQVCE3276N9Z

PQMC10217Z

PQMC 10218Z

PQEFBDB111GP

PQJM122Z

PQLI2B201

ECRLA010A53R

PQVCJ 1025N0Z

ERJ3GEYJ 103

R202 ERJ3GEYJ332

R203 ERJ3GEYJ473

R205 ERJ3GEYJ473

R206 ERJ3GEYJ473

R207 ERJ3GEYJ473

R208

R209

R210

R211

R212

R213

R214

R215

R216

R218

ERJ3GEYJ224

ERJ3GEYJ473

ERJ3GEYJ681

ERJ3GEYJ222

ERJ3GEYJ103

ERJ3GEYJ222

ERJ3GEYJ274

ERJ3GEYJ472

ERJ3GEYOR00

R219 ERJ3GEYJ124

R220 ERJ3GEYJ104

R221 ERJ3GEYJ683

R222 ERJ3GEYJ104

R223 ERJ3GEYJ153

R224 ERJ3GEYJ153

R225 ERJ3GEYJ683

R226 ERJ3GEYJ104

R227 ERJ3GEYJ273

R228 ERJ3GEYJ273

R229 ERJ3GEYJ473

R230 ERJ3GEYOR00

R231 ERJ3GEYJ123

R232 ERJ3GEYJ472

R233 ERJ3GEYJ823

R234 ERJ3GEYJ563

R235 ERJ3GEYJ823

R236 ERJ3GEYOR00

R237 ERJ3GEYJ101

R239 ERJ3GEYJ823

R240 ERJ3GEYJ393

R241 ERJ3GEYJ105

R243 ERJ3GEYJ333

R245 ERJ3GEYJ100

Part Name & Description & Value

(CRYSTALS)

CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR

(OTHERS)

MAGNETIC SHIELD COVER

BUZZER

MICROPHONE

I.F. TRANSFORMER

TRIMMER CAPACITOR

VARIABLE CAPACITOR

(RESISTORS)

10K

3.3K

47K

220K

47K

680

2.2K

10K

2.2K

270K

4.7K

JUMPER, 0Q

120K

100K

68K

100K

15K

68K

100K

27K

47K

JUMPER, 0Q

12K

4.7K

82K

56K

82K

JUMPER, 0Q

100

82K

39K

33K

-227-

IKX-F900

I This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only. Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

PaM No._el. No.

120K

22K

10K

120K

10K

220

5.6K

15K

470K

82K

56K

4.7K

100

10K

390K

270

220K

10K

330

JUMPER, 0_

47K

27K

330

390

33K

2.2K

10K

22K

100

33K

820

680

15K

2.2K

18K

680

15K

22K

100 K

ERJ3GEYJ 124

ERJ3GEYJ223

ERJ3GEYJ 103

_>46

247

_>48

._49

100

470K

1.5K

100K

560K

4.7K

330K

Pcs

I I

250

251

ERJ3GEYJ124

ERJ3GEYJ103

252 ERJ3GEYJ100

253 ERJ3GEYJ221

254 ERJ3GEYJ562

255 ERJ3GEYJ153

256 ERJ3GEYJ102

257 ERJ3GEYJ474

258 ERJ3GEYJ823

259 ERJ3GEYJ563

260 ERJ3GEYJ472

264 ERJ3GEYJ101

265 ERJ3GEYJ103

273 ERJ3GEYJ394

280 ERJ3GEYJ271

282 ERJ3GEYJ224

283 ERJ3GEYJ103

286 ERJ3GEYJ331

288 ERJ3GEYOR00

289 ERJ3GEYJ473

290 ERJ3GEYJ273

:291 ERJ3GEYJ100

;294 ERJ3GEYJ102

1297 ERJ3GEYJ331

1298 ERJ3GEYJ331

1299 ERJ3GEYJ331

1300 ERJ3GEYJ331

1303 ERJ3GEYJ391

1306 ERJ3GEYJ333

I307 ERJ3GEYJ222

1308 ERJ3GEYJ103

1401 ERJ3GEYJ223

1402 ERJ3GEYJ470

1403 ERJ3GEYJ101

1404 ERJ3GEYJ333

1405 ERJ3GEYJ821

1406 ERJ3GEYJ681

1407 ERJ3GEYJ153

1408 ERJ3GEYJ153

1409 ERJ3GEYJ153

_410 ERJ3GEYJ222

_411 ERJ3GEYJ183

_412 ERJ3GEYJ183

_413 ERJ3GEYJ470

:1414 ERJ3GEYJ470

_415 ERJ3GEYJ681

_416 ERJ3GEYJ153

t417 ERJ3GEYJ153

t418 ERJ3GEYJ223

t419 ERJ3GEYJ104

:1420 ERJ3GEYJ470

_421 ERJ3GEYJ101

R423 ERJ3GEYJ474

R424 ERJ3GEYJ152

R425 ERJ3GEYJ104

R427 ERJ3GEYJ564

R428 ERJ3GEYJ472

R429 ERJ3GEYJ334

Value

[ 1

tef. No. I Part No.

430 IERJ3GEYJ334

431 IERJ3GEYJ821

432 IERJ3GEYJ102

434 I ERJ3GEYJ222

435 IERJ3GEYJ222

436 IERJ3GEYJ123

437 IERJ3GEYJ220

438 IERJ3GEYJ222

439 IERJ3GEYJ222

440 I ERJ3GEYJ222

441 IERJ3GEYJ222

442 IERJ3GEYJI01

453 IERJ3GEYOR00

456 IERJ3GEYOR00

457 I ERJ3GEYJ822

458 I ERJ3GEYOR00

459 IERJ3GEYJ680

460 |ERJ3GEYOR00

461 |ECUV1HO40CCV

462 / ERJ3GEYJ680

_00 /PQ4 R18XJ0O0

202~2051ERJ3GEYOR00

208-15 / ERJ3GEYOR00

;494 ERJ3GEYOR00

:527 ERJ3GEYOR00

;201 PQCUV1H103KB

:202 PQCUV1H103KB

:203 ECUV1H103KBV

;204 ECUV1 H103KBV

;205 ECUV1H103KBV

;206 ECUVlCl04KBV

;207 ECEAOJKA331

;208 ECEAlCKSl00

;213 ECUV1H101JCV

;214 ECUVlCl04KBV

;215 ECUV1H391JCV

;217 ECUV1H104ZFV

;218 ECUVlA105ZFV

;219 ECUV1H104ZFV

;220 ECUV1H 104ZFV

;221 ECUV1H102KBV

;222 ECUV1H472KBV

;223 ECEA1VKS4R7

;224 PQCUV 1H105JC

3225 ECUV1H223KBV

3226 ECUVlH472KBV

D227 ECUV1H471JCV

3228 ECEA1CKSIO0

C230 ECEAlCKS100

C231 ECEA1VKS4R7

C232 ECUV1HIO4ZFV

C233 ECUV1H822KBV

C234 ECUV1A105ZFV

_C235 iECUV1R104ZFV

Value

330K

820

2.2K

12K

2.2K

100

JUMPER, 0_

8.2K

JUMPER, 0_

JUMPER, OQ

JUMPER, 0_

(CAPACITORS)

0.01

0.1

330

100P

0.1

390P

0.1

0.001

3.0047

4.7

0.022

0.0047

470P

4.7

0.1

0.0082

0.1

Pcs

S 1

s 1

S 1

- 228-

IKX-F900

This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only. Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

Ref. No.

C237

C238

C239

C240

C241

C242

C243

C244

C246

C248

C250

C251

C252

C253

C254

C255

C256

C259

C261

C262

C263

C264

C265

C266

C267

C402

C404

C405

C406

C407

C408

0409

._410

0411

0412

0413

0,414

C415

0417

C418

C419

C420

C422

C423

C424

C425

C427

C428

C429

C430

C431

C432

C433

0434

_436

0437

C438

C439

C440

C441

C442

C443

C445

Part No.

ECUV1H 102KBV 0.001

ECUV1C104KBV 0.1

ECUVlA105ZFV 1

ECEA1CKS470 47

ECUVlA105ZFV 1

ECEA1CKS470 47

ECUV1H 103KBV 0.01

ECUVlH 182KBV 0.0018

ECUVlCl04KBV D.1

ECEAOJK221 220

ECUVIC104KBV 0.1

ECSTOJX226 220

ECUV1H 180JCV 18P

ECUV1H104MD 0.1

ECUV1C104KBV 0.1

ECSTOJX226 220

ECUV1A105ZFV 1

ECUVlC104KBV 0.1

ECUV1H104ZFV 0.1

ECUVlH 104ZFV 0.1

ECUV1H104ZFV 0.1

ECUVIH104ZFV 0.1

ECUV1H104ZFV 0.1

ECUV1H182KBV 0.0018

;ECUV1H104ZFV 0.1

ECUV1HOR5CCV 0.5

ECUV1H102KBV 0.001

ECUV1H020CCV 2P

ECUV1H102KBV 0.001

ECUVlH040CCV 4P

ECUV1H020CCV 2P

ECUV1H1R5CCV 1.5

ECEA1CKS470 47

ECUVlH103KBV 0.01

ECUV 1H040CCV _4P

PQCUVlC224KB ).22

ECUV1H332KBV D.0033

ECUV1H332KBV 0.0033

ECUV 1H820JCV 82P

ECUV 1H430JCV 43P

ECUV1H080DCV 8P

ECUV1H103KBV 0.01

ECUV1H030CCV 3P

ECUV1H102KBV 0.001

ECUVlH102KBV 0.001

ECUV1H102KBV 0.001

ECUVlH060DCV 6P

ERJ3GEYJ470 47

ECUV1H103KBV 0.01

ECEA 10KS470 47

ECUV1H562KBV 0.0056

ECUV 1H562KBV 0.0056

PQCUV1C224KB ).22

ECUV1H680JCV 68P

ECUV1H103KBV 0.01

ECUV1H220JCV 22P

PQCUVlE104MD 0.1

ECUV1H680JCV 68P

ECUV1H333KDV 0.033

ECUV1H821KBV 820P

ECUV1H472KBV 0.0047

Part Name &Description & Value Pcs

S 1

S, 1

S 1

Ref. No. Part No.

C446 ECUV1H020CCV

C448 ECUV1C104KBV

C449 ECUVlH103KBV

C450 ECUVlCl04KBV

C451 PQCUV1H105JC

C452 ECUV1H103KBV

C476 ECUV1H102KBV

C482 ECUV1HOR5CCV

C486 ECUV1H102KBV

C487 ECUV1H102KBV

C488 ECUV1H101JCV

C489 ECUV1H010CCV

C491 ECUV1H030CCV

C492 ECUV1H102KBV

C495 ECEA1CKS470

C498 ECUV1H101JCV

C499 ECUV1H101JCV

C500

C501

C502

C503

C504

C505

C506

C507

C508

C509

C510

C511

C512

C513

C517

C518

C525

ECUV1H101JCV

ECUV1 H101JCV

ECUVlH101JCV

ECUV1H101JCV

ECUVl H101JCV

ECUV1 H101JCV

ECUVlH101JCV

ECUV1H101JCV

ECUV1 H101JCV

ERJ3GEYJ470

Part Name & Description & Value

0.1

0.01

0.1

0.01

0.001

0.5

0.001

100P

0.001

100P

Pcs

S: 1

S 1

CHARGER BOARD PARTS

PCB8 PFLP1057M CHARGER P.C.BOARD ASS'Y (RTI 1

(DIODES)

DIODE(St)

DIODE(SI)

D651 MA4220

D652 MA4220

D653 MA4220

LED651 PQVDR325CA47

LED652 PQVDR325CA47

LED S 1

-229-

KX-Fg00I

.............................

This replacement parts list is for U.S.A. version only. Refer to the simplified manual (cover) for other areas.

Ref. No. Part No.

CN651 PFJS08R26Z

CN652 PQJT10119Z

CN653 PQJT10119Z

CN654 PQJT10119Z

L651 PQLQZK330K

L652 PQLQZK330K

L653 PQLQZK330K

L654 PQLQZK330K

L655 PQLQZK330K

R651

R652

ERDS2TJ271

Pa_ Name & Description & Value Pcs

(CONNECTORS)

CONNECTOR 1

BATTERYTERMINAL 1

BATTERY TERMINAL 1

[COILS)

COIL

(RESISOTRS)

270

FIXTURES AND TOOLS

PQZZ2K12Z

PQZZ2K6Z

PFZZ8K23Z

PQZZ6K14Z

PQZZ2Kt3Z

PQZZ9K7Z

PQZZt1K8Z

PQZZ5K6Z

PFZZ5K13Z

PQZZ2K6Z

PQZZ10K4Z

PQZZ8K18Z

PQZZ2K12Z

PFZZ7K15Z

PFZZ18K4Z

PFZZ8K24Z

PQZZ10K11Z

PFZZfF780M

PFZZ2F780M

PFZZ3F900M

otes:

EXTENTION CORD, 2 PIN

EXTENTION CORD, 8 PIN

EXTENTION CORD, 6 PIN

EXTENTION CORD, 2 PIN

EXTENTION CORD, 9 PIN

EXTENTION CORD, 11 PIN

EXTENTION CORD, 5 PIN

EXTENTION CORD, 2 PIN

EXTENTION CORD, 10 PIN

EXTENTION CORD, 8 PIN

EXTENTION CORD, 2 PIN

EXTENTION CORD, 7 PIN

EXTENTION CORD, 18 PIN

EXTENTION CORD, 8 PIN

EXTENTION CORD, 10 PIN

CCD ADJUSTMENT TOOL

SPRING HEIGHT TOOL

IC TOOL (for STATUS CHECKING)

[Refer to page 57:/

1. Tools (EC20-EC22) and Extension Cords (Ref. No. EC12, EC13)

are necessities for servicing.

2. Extension Cords (Ref. No. EC1-EC 17, EC14-EC 17) are useful

for servicing. (They make servicing easy.)

I I

- 230-

Y (Q)

KXF900

Printed in Japan

Panasonic KX F900 User Manual FAX MACHINE Manuals And Guides 97120075

PANASONIC Fax Machines Manual 97120075 PANASONIC Fax Machines Owner's Manual, PANASONIC Fax Machines installation guides

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation